JP6761445B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine having the above configuration, a game machine having a function of generating a reel effect at the start of a game has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this game machine, in the unit game immediately before the unit game in which the reel effect is performed, a notification is made to stop and display a specific symbol combination at a specific position. Then, when the reel effect occurs at the start of the game, the reel is temporarily stopped at a position rotated by a preset number of symbol frames according to the type of the reel effect, and at this time, if the privilege is decided to be given. , A specific symbol combination is displayed on a predetermined line at the time of this pause.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-254920

However, with such a game machine, a player who is unfamiliar with the eye-catching may not be able to easily grasp that the privilege has been granted.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game with peace of mind even for a player who is unfamiliar with pressing.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each peripheral surface, a symbol display area for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of each of the reels, and a predetermined start condition are satisfied. Based on this, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol displayed in the symbol display area by rotating each of the reels, and a plurality of combinations based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition. An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from the inside, a plurality of stop operating means provided corresponding to each of the reels and receiving a stop operation of the player, and the stop operating means operated by the player. Then, according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped, so that the fluctuation of the symbol displayed in the symbol display area is stopped. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the means, the notification means for notifying the player of the information of the stop operation, and the internal winning combination determining means, the stop display finally displayed in the symbol display area. Regardless of the mode, when the special state control means for controlling the special state that can be notified by the notification means from the next game and the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the next game The special combination includes a reel effect control means capable of controlling each reel so that a special effect in which a special stop display mode is displayed in the symbol display area is executed when is started. Depending on the stop operation of, the special stop display mode may or may not be finally displayed in the symbol display area, and the special effect is produced by the internal winning combination determining means. In a game in which the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be executed when a stop display mode different from the special stop display mode is displayed in the symbol display area, and the notification means has the special effect. A gaming machine characterized in that information on a stop operation can be notified to a player even in an executed game.
The special effect is a game in which the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, and is not executed when the special stop display mode is displayed in the symbol display area, and the symbol display is performed. The gaming machine according to the above , wherein when a stop display mode different from the special stop display mode is displayed in the area, the game is executed in the first game of the special state .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game with peace of mind even for a player who is unfamiliar with pressing.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery value change table for RT1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (2) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 3) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 5) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 6) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (7) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (8) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (9) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 10) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (11) for small combination / replay in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for turning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table (No. 1) for the first stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table (No. 2) for the first stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (an example at the case where the table change data at the time of a forward push is "00"). It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (example at the case where the table change data at the time of a forward push is "01"). It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (an example at the case where the table change data at the time of a forward push is "02"). It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (example at the case where the table change data at the time of a forward push is "03"). It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the table number for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push is "00"). It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the table number for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push is "15"). It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the table number for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push is "12"). It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the table number for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push is "19"). It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the table number for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push is "20"). It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the irregular push table selection data is "00"). It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention (the example when the irregular push table selection data is "01"). It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table (at the time of the 1st stop of a left reel) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table (at the time of the 1st stop of a middle reel) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table (when the right reel first stops) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol stop position storage area (when the winning combination is "C_PB lip 02") in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state and the game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table which shows the relationship between the RT state and the game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table between the mode in one embodiment of the present invention and the winning probability thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of a replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table of the mode and AT winning probability in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table of the number of ART games in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol position table at the time of a reel production in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel action pattern table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel action data selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel action code determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel action code table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel production operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition effect line lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition generation flag and the type data subtraction value table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a content table of the missing flag in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a correspondence table which shows the relationship between each value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags in one Embodiment of this invention, and the corresponding processing content. It is a figure which shows the output specification of the external signal to the external centralized terminal board in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect control process at the start of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the stop position determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the stop position determination process for addition effect in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel rotation start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random acceleration processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the slide piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing after the second stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the RT game number processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART game number addition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect control process at the end of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt processing by the control of the main CPU (Central Processing Unit) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in a normal gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random acceleration processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random acceleration processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random acceleration processing in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process (the 1) in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the prize search process (the 2) in the modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition generation flag and the type data subtraction value table in the modification 5.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine having an ART (pseudo-bonus) function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. In addition, as the types of symbol combinations, there are those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout and replay (replay) operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means and the special game stop control means of the corresponding reel are based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Controls to stop the rotation.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is defined as four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means can combine the symbols along the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of symbols related to the winning is a combination, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of motions is performed as one game (unit game).

In the pachislot machine, in the series of operations described above, various effects can be produced by using a display device to display an image, various lamps to output light, a speaker to output sound, or a combination of these. Will be done. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as will be described later, various reel effects for notifying the winning of ART and the like are also performed during the acceleration period of the reel at the start of the game of ART.

Further, in the pachislot machine, when the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect content to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols that the player should aim for). It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. Note that FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[Appearance structure]
As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes a cabinet 1a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 1b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 1a. Three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variation display means) are provided inside the cabinet 1a, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the reels). Will be done. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively.

Each reel (display row) has a cylindrical reel main body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface (circular surface) of the reel main body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are continuously drawn on the surface of the sheet material along the circumferential direction of the reel body.

A display device 10 (notifying means) is provided in the center of the front door 1b. The display device 10 includes a display screen including a display window 4 for displaying the symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, the effect is executed using the entire display screen including the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the display unit provided on the upper part of the display window 4 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged in a matrix. Then, in this display unit, the effect (notification) is performed by the dot pattern represented by turning on and off the plurality of LEDs. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display unit provided on the upper part of the display window 4 may be composed of a liquid crystal display device.

The display window 4 is made of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate, and is provided at a position overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side) as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be located in front of one reel (on the player side). Therefore, the patterns drawn on the three reels provided behind the display window 4 can be visually recognized through the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the display window 4 displays three consecutively arranged symbols among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window 4 is stopped. It is configured to be able to. That is, in the frame of the display window 4, upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel, and one symbol can be displayed in each region. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the symbols are displayed in the frame of the display window 4 in a 3 × 3 arrangement form. Then, in the present embodiment, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is a line for determining whether or not to win (hereinafter, It is defined as a valid line).

Further, a 7-segment display 6 composed of a 7-segment LED is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the display device 10. The 7-segment display 6 is the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals), the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid out medals), and is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Information such as the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits) is digitally displayed.

Further, the front door 1b is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 11, MAX bet button 12, 1BET button 14, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) to be operated by the player.

The medal insertion slot 11 is provided to receive medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received through the medal slot 11 are inserted into one game up to a predetermined number (for example, 3), and the excess of the predetermined number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called). Credit function). In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in one game is three.

The MAX bet button 12 and the 1BET button 14 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited in the pachislot machine 1 to be inserted into one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the front door 1b is provided with a settlement button (located on the side of the start lever 16 opposite to the stop button side). This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the front door 1b is provided with a medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 21L, 21R, and the like. Further, the front door 1b is provided with a lamp 20 or the like.

The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. Further, the lamp 20 provided on the front door 1b is composed of LEDs and the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. In addition, the speakers 21L and 21R output sound effects, music, and the like corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 1b is open, showing the structure on the back surface side of the front door 1b and the internal structure of the cabinet 1a.

A main board 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 described later (see FIG. 4 described later) is provided in an upper portion in the cabinet 1a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operations of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 1a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4 described later) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Will be done.

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in a lower portion of the cabinet 1a. Further, in the cabinet 1a, one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 is provided with a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device included in the pachi-slot machine 1.

On the back side portion of the front door 1b (the portion opposite to the display screen side), a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5 described later) described later is configured in the upper portion of the arrangement area of the display window 4. A sub-board 32 is provided. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 42 will be described later.

Further, in the back side portion of the front door 1b, a selector 35 is provided in a lower portion of the arrangement area of the display window 4. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 11, and guides the medals determined to be appropriate to the hopper 33. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 4 described later) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. Note that FIG. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram showing an internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, and a hopper drive circuit 65. And, the payout completion signal circuit 66 is included.

The microcomputer 50 is composed of a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 includes a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51 (see FIGS. 87 to 112 described later), a data table such as an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 6 to 59 described later), and a sub control circuit 42. Data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the user is stored. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area (see FIGS. 60 to 66) for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

As shown in FIG. 4, the clock pulse generation circuit 54, the frequency divider 55, the random number generator 56, and the sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

Various switches, sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like to control the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The checkout switch 14S detects that the checkout button has been pressed by the player.

The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 11 has passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 12S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 12 or 1BET button 14) has been pressed by the player.

Further, as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display means), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index indicating that the reel has rotated once for each reel by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to rotate the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels there are symbols). Only rotated).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1". "Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols. Therefore, for example, when the stop button corresponding to a predetermined reel is pressed during the game, the inside of the display window 4 is displayed. The symbols of the predetermined reels located in the corresponding area on the winning determination line and the symbols existing in the range up to four points thereof are the symbols that can be stopped in the area. In addition, even when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in various reel effects described later, a reel index is detected for each reel in the same manner as described above, and a specific symbol is displayed based on the detection result. Stop it.

Further, the display unit drive circuit 64 included in the main control circuit 41 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 33 has reached a predetermined number of payouts.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub-control circuit 42 is connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, a driver 86, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, and A. It includes a / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92 and an amplifier 93.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, an effect random value is extracted, and an effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display device 10 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp 20, a speaker 21L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by the 21R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light are included.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, peripheral devices such as a display device 10, speakers 21L and 21R, and a lamp 20 are connected to the sub control circuit 42, and the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub control circuit 42. Be controlled.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create an image according to the dot pattern data specified by the effect content, and the created image is generated by the display device 10. Is displayed.

Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 21L and 21R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp 20 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 59. In addition, here, the configuration of various data tables required for the basic operation of the game will be mainly described, and the contents of these processes will be described for the configurations of various data tables required for various reel effects and random acceleration processing described later. It will be described as appropriate in the description.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 6). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and defines the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, "0" to "20" corresponding to the symbol counters are set as symbol positions in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (arrow A direction in FIG. 6) with reference to the symbol position "0". Assigned to a symbol.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window 4. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the display window 4 have the symbol position "8" "8", respectively. The symbols corresponding to "Apple 1", "Bell 1" at the symbol position "7", and "Replay 2" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 20. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is not specified in the symbol combination table, so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "loss".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 60 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 42 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out. In the present embodiment, the display combination in which such medals are paid out is collectively referred to as a "small combination".

In the present embodiment, for example, a display combination related to the “bell” (any one of “C_CL bell 01” to “C_XU bell 12” shown in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20) is determined as the display combination. Occasionally, nine medals are paid out for the number of three medals inserted. Further, for example, when a display combination related to "apple" (any of "C_CL apple 01" to "C_XU apple 08" shown in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20) is determined as the display combination. , 6 medals are paid out for the number of inserted 3 medals.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, any of the display combinations related to the replay as the display combination (any of the symbol combinations related to "C_RT1 lip 01" to "C_normal lip 24" shown in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20". When it is decided, the replay is activated.

In addition, the display combination related to "R_RT1 transition 1" to "R_RT1 transition 32" shown in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20 could not stop and display the symbol combination related to "special bell" on the effective line. It is a combination that is displayed when (missed), and is a display combination that triggers the transition of the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (general gaming state) described later. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of "R_RT1 transition 1" to "R_RT1 transition 32" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later. ..

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, eight types of RT game states, from RT0 game state to RT7 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the stop display of the symbol combination related to the predetermined combination on the effective line triggers the transition between the RT gaming states. Specifically, the combination of symbols of the roles related to "special bell spill" or various replays ("Replay 1" to "Replay 6", "Replay 8", "Replay B", "Replay R" and "Replay P" ”), The RT game state shifts when the symbol combination of the combination (hereinafter referred to as the replay combination) is displayed.

The symbol combination of the role related to the "special bell spill" that triggers the transition of the RT game state is any one of "R_RT1 transition 1" to "R_RT1 transition 32" specified in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20. It is a combination of symbols. Further, the symbol combination of the replay combination that triggers the transition of the RT game state is any of the symbol combinations of "C_RT1 lip 01" to "C_RT7 lip 12" defined in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, refer to the RT transition table. A more specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 67. Further, in the following, the RT gaming state is simply referred to as "RT state". Therefore, the RT0 gaming state to the RT7 gaming state are also referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT7 state", respectively.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24. The internal lottery table includes small winning combination / replay data pointers “0” to “52” associated with each of the winning numbers “0” to “52” in each RT state, and the small winning combination / replay data pointers. Specifies the correspondence with the lottery value when is determined.

The small winning combination / replay data pointer is data acquired as a result of a lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is defined by the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 26 to 36) described later. It is the data to specify. In the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery value defined corresponding to the winning number (small winning combination / replay data pointer) “0” is the lottery value related to “loss”. Further, the lottery value defined corresponding to the winning numbers "1" to "30" (abbreviated as "F_rip 0" to "F_rip G9") is the lottery value related to the replay combination, and the winning number "31". The lottery value defined corresponding to "52" (abbreviated as "F_bell ALL" to "F_apple") is a lottery value related to a small winning combination.

In the present embodiment, as is clear from comparing the lottery values defined in the columns of each RT state in FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery values related to the small winning combination are the same regardless of the RT state. However, the setting of the lottery value related to the replay combination (the type of the winning replay combination and the lottery value thereof) differs depending on the RT state. The setting contents of the lottery value related to the replay combination in each RT state will be described more specifically later with reference to FIG. 67 together with the transition contents of the RT state.

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number has been won, and the data pointer assigned to the winning number is acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the higher the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (data pointer) will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

Specifically, for example, when the current RT state is the RT1 state, the probability that the winning number "0" (abbreviated as "missing") is won and "0" is acquired as the data pointer for small win / replay ( The probability of winning the "loss" internally is "34256/65536" (see FIG. 22). Further, for example, when the current RT state is the RT1 state, the probability that the winning number "2" (abbreviated as "F_lip G1A") is won and "2" is acquired as the data pointer for small win / replay is It becomes "5/65536" (see FIG. 22). Further, for example, when the current RT state is the RT1 state, the probability that the winning number "31" (abbreviated as "F_bell ALL") is won and "31" is acquired as the data pointer for small win / replay is It becomes "819/65536" (see FIG. 23).

[Lottery price change table]
In the present embodiment, the setting of the winning probability (expected value) of the small winning combination / replay data pointer “2” (winning number “2”) in the RT1 state can be changed in advance. FIG. 25 is a lottery value changing table (lottery value setting changing means) used when changing the lottery value setting in the RT1 state.

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the lottery value in the RT1 state can be set to any of setting 1 to setting 6. The lottery value of the RT1 state of the setting 1 in FIG. 25 corresponds to the lottery value described in the column of the RT1 state in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 22 and 23.

In the present embodiment, the lottery value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer “2” (winning number “2”) is linearly increased as the set numerical value (1 to 6) increases. Specifically, in this example, the lottery value change table is set so that the lottery value increases by 5 when the set numerical value increases by 1.

In the present embodiment, the game state is changed to the "normal game state" (RT1 or RT7 state) described later by changing the setting of the winning probability of the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (win number "2") in advance. Left reel that constitutes a display combination (in this embodiment, a combination corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip G1A" in FIG. 25) that triggers the transition to the "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state: ART state) described later. The main specific symbols of 3L (in this embodiment, "apple 2" at symbol position "5", "red 7" at symbol position "4", and "apple 2" at symbol position "3") The probability displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L can be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the additional lottery table for the number of ART games referred to in the “pseudo-bonus” game described later (see FIG. 73 described later) is linked to the set value of the lottery value change table in the RT1 state. The winning probability of the additional lottery changes according to the set numerical value. Specifically, in the additional lottery table described later, as the set numerical value (1 to 6) increases, the winning probability of the additional lottery in the game of "pseudo-bonus" (the "additional effect" (reel effect) described later occurs. Frequency) increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing the setting of the winning probability of the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (winning number "2") in advance, the transition to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state) described later is made. It is possible to change the probability that the specific symbol of the left reel 3L, which constitutes the display role that triggers the game, is displayed, and the winning probability of the additional lottery in the "pseudo-bonus" game described later (the "additional effect" described later (described later). The frequency of occurrence of the reel effect) can be changed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the "pseudo-bonus" described later, it is possible to predict the numerical value of the current setting by grasping the frequency at which the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L.

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 36. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is determined, the data of the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired from the internal winning combination determination table.

The "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, which allows display along the effective line. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned. When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations is not permitted.

26 to 36 are diagrams showing the configuration of an internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay in the present embodiment. The internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the replay combination for the small combination / replay data pointers "1" to "52". That is, the internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

The “○” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the winning internal winning combination in the acquired small combination / replay data pointer. For example, when "2" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_RT3 rip 01" to "C_RT3 rip 46" and "C_BB rip 01" to "C_BB rip 13" are used as internal winning combinations. "Is duplicated. Further, for example, when "31" is acquired as a data pointer for a small combination / replay, "C_CL bell 01" to "C_CL bell 08" and "C_XU bell 01" to "C_XU" are used as internal winning combinations. "Bell 12" wins twice.

[Number selection table for stopping the rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

In the present embodiment, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table defines a different rotating cylinder stop number for each small winning combination / replay data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected.

In the present embodiment, as the rotation cylinder stop number selection table, an example in which a different rotation cylinder stop number is defined for each small combination / replay data pointer is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same rotation stop number may be specified for different small winning combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the spinning stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation cylinder stop number, the determination data for each pressing order (pull-in priority table number and pull-in priority selection table number), and the table number selection value at the time of irregular pressing (at the time of irregular pressing). Table selection data and change status), forward-pressed table change data, forward-pressed table selection data, and forward-pressed table change initial data selection value (table number and change status) are specified.

The attraction priority selection table number and the attraction priority table number are data used in the attraction priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table number specified in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 57 described later) is used. Data on the priority of the corresponding display combination can be acquired. Further, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIGS. 54 to 56 described later) is referred to and the pull-in is performed. The pull-in priority table number is determined based on the pull-in priority selection table data corresponding to the priority order selection table number.

The table numbers of the touch-the-numbers table change data, the touch-the-numbers table selection data, and the touch-the-numbers table change initial data selection values are stop tables (FIGS. 41 and 42 described later) that are referred to when the touch the number is performed. And FIGS. 47 to 51). The "forward push" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation performed) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the case where the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left middle right" and "left middle right".

The irregular push table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIGS. 52 and 53 described later) to be referred to when the irregular push is performed. The "irregular push" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "middle right / left". Corresponds to the case where the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "right middle left" and "right middle left".

In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is controlled so as to stop within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started to be stopped, and this is referred to as a "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

With reference to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as "sliding piece number determination data"), the pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 57 described later). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of a forward push, a first stop table for a forward push (see FIGS. 41 and 42 described later) and a second and third stop tables for a forward push (see FIGS. 47 to 51 below). Refer to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the stop table at the time of irregular pressing (see FIGS. 52 and 53 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. The stop table for the first stop at the time of the forward push is the stop start position "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L, the data for determining the number of sliding pieces, and the slip piece number determination data in each of the table selection data "00" to "07" at the time of the forward push. Define the correspondence with the change status. The change status is used when referring to the touch-the-numbers control change table (see FIGS. 43 to 46 described later) described later.

Here, as an example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (winning number "2") is won, the above-mentioned specific symbol of the left reel 3L (the apple at the symbol position "5" in FIG. 6) 2 ”,“ Red 7 ”at the symbol position“ 4 ”and“ Apple 2 ”at the symbol position“ 3 ”) will be described.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (win number "2") is acquired, the rotating cylinder stop number "2" is acquired from the rotating cylinder stop number selection table shown in FIG. 37. In this case, as shown in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 38, the forward press table selection data "02" is acquired. That is, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (winning number "2") is acquired (the winning combination corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip G1A" is won), and the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L. If this is done, the slip piece number determination data described in the column of the forward push table selection data "02" in the forward push first stop table in FIG. 41 is referred to.

In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L at the timing of the symbol position "4" (when the stop button is pressed), the number of sliding pieces determination data is "0" (the number of sliding pieces is "0"). 0 ”), and when the stop operation is performed, the symbol (“red 7”) located on the determination line is stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L at the timing of the symbol position "5", the number of sliding pieces determination data becomes "0" (the number of sliding pieces is "0"), and the stop operation is performed. At that time, the symbol (“apple 2”) located on the determination line is stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L at the timing of the symbol position "3", the number of sliding pieces determination data becomes "2" (the number of sliding pieces is "2"), and the stop operation is performed. At that time, the symbol (“apple 2”) two ahead of the symbol (“apple 2”) located on the determination line is stopped and displayed.

That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (winning number "2") is acquired and the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the above-mentioned specific symbol is positioned on the determination line. When the stop operation is performed at the timing of the stop, the corresponding specific symbol is always displayed as a stop.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the touch-the-numbers control change table will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. Note that FIG. 43 is a touch-the-numbers control change table when the forward-press table change data is "00", and FIG. 44 shows a touch-the-numbers table change data when the touch-the-numbers is "01". This is a control change table. Further, FIG. 45 shows a touch-the-numbers control change table when the forward-pressed table change data is “02”, and FIG. 46 shows a touch-the-numbers when the forward-pressed table change data is “03”. This is a control change table.

The touch-the-numbers control change table defines the correspondence between the position to be changed (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, and the stop table numbers for the second and third stops when the touch the number is pushed forward. For example, the forward push table change data acquired based on the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 38 to 40) is “00”, and the forward push stop table for the first stop (see FIGS. 41 and 42). ) Is "0" and the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L is "18", the forward push control change table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to. When pushed forward, the stop table number for the second and third stops is "11 (B line)". If the change table data is not registered at the target position in the touch-the-numbers control change table, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when touching forward and stop table for irregular push]
Next, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 53. The second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular times define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 47 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "00". The second / third stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 48 is referred to when the second / third stop table number for forward pressing is “15”. The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 49 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "12". The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 50 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "19". Further, the stop table for the second and third stops during the forward push shown in FIG. 51 is referred to when the stop table number for the second and third stops during the forward push is "20".

The irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 52 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “00”. Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 53 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “01”.

The stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables when pressing forward and the stop table when pressing irregularly is appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel. Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bits corresponding to the "A line" column and the "B line" column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by allocating information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is sequentially searched for whether or not "1" is defined as the corresponding data. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column is determined by referring to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Next, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed. Then, the slip piece number determination data is acquired based on the search result.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. The pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 54 is a table that is referred to when the left reel 3L is first stopped, and the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 55 has the middle reel 3C as the first table. It is a table referred to when the right reel 3R is stopped, and the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 56 is a table referred to when the right reel 3R is first stopped.

Each attraction priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the attraction priority selection table data and the pressing order of the stop button and the attraction priority table number in each combination. The attraction priority table number specified in each attraction priority table selection table is data for acquiring information on the priority of the display combination specified in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 57 described later). is there.

Further, the attraction priority selection table data defined in each attraction priority table selection table is determined based on the attraction priority selection table number obtained by referring to the reel stop initial setting table of FIGS. 38 to 40. Will be done. Specifically, in the pull-in priority selection table data consisting of three digits, the last two digits correspond to the pull-in priority selection table number. Then, the first digit of the pull-in priority selection table data corresponds to the type of the first stopped reel.

In the present embodiment, when the left reel 3L is first stopped, the first digit of the pull-in priority selection table data is set to "1", and when the middle reel 3C is first stopped, the pull-in priority order is set. The first digit value of the selection table data is set to "2", and when the right reel 3R is first stopped, the first digit value of the pull-in priority selection table data is set to "3". Therefore, for example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority selection table number acquired by referring to the reel stop initialization table is "11", the attraction priority selection table data is "11". 111 ”, when the right reel 3R is first stopped and the attraction priority selection table number acquired by referring to the reel stop initialization table is“ 11 ”, the attraction priority selection table data is“ 311 ”. ".

Here, an example of the reference procedure (procedure for determining the attraction priority table number) of the attraction priority table selection table will be described. The pull-in priority table selection table is executed for each reel stop operation. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the pull-in priority selection table number acquired by referring to the reel stop initial setting table is "11", the pull-in in the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 54 Refer to the information described in the column of the priority selection table data "111".

Next, the type of the reel for which the second stop operation has been performed is determined, and the information in the column of the pressing order "1-X-2" of the attraction priority selection table data is referred to. The pressing order "1-X-2" indicates that the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R were stopped in this order. At this time, when the second stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R, it corresponds to the pressing order "1-X-2" (correct answer in the pressing order), so the pull-in priority table number "01" is acquired. Will be done. On the other hand, when the second stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, the pressing order "1-X-2" does not correspond (the pressing order is incorrect), so the pull-in priority table number "02" is acquired. Will be done.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed, the type of reel at that time is determined, and the information in the column of the pressing order "1-3-2" of the attraction priority selection table data is referred to. The pressing order "1-3-2" indicates that the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R, and the middle reel 3C were stopped in this order. At this time, when the third stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R, it does not correspond to the pressing order "1-3-2" (the pressing order is incorrect), so the pull-in priority table number "02" is set. Acquired (the attraction priority table number acquired during the second stop operation is maintained). On the other hand, when the third stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, the pressing order "1-3-2" is applicable (the pressing order is correct), so that the pull-in priority table number "01" is acquired. (The pull-in priority table number acquired during the second stop operation is maintained).

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 57. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "02" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search whether or not a more appropriate number of slip pieces exists in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority to be stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each of the pull-in data is the same as the "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 26 to 36 and the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20. It is represented by byte data, and a unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for forward stop (see FIGS. 41 to 42). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table, a more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table number is "00", the number of priority divisions is set to 1, and when the pull-in priority table number is "01", the number of priority divisions is set. If the pull-in priority table number is "02", the number of priority divisions is set to 3. In addition, here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority order when the pull-in priority table number is "01" will be described, and the description of the priority in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "1" includes "C_RT1 rip 01" to "C_RT1 rip 08", "C_RT3 rip 01" to "C_RT3 rip 46", and "C_RT4 rip 01". ~ "C_RT4 Lip 42", "C_PB Lip 01" ~ "C_PB Lip 09", "C_RT7 Lip 01" ~ "C_RT7 Lip 12", and "C_XD Bell 01" ~ "C_XD Bell 12" Is regulated. The priority order "2" includes "R_RT1 transition 1" to "R_RT1 transition 32", "C_RT5 rip 01" to "C_RT5 rip 18", "C_normal rip 01" to "C_normal rip 24", and The pull-in data corresponding to "C_CL bell 01" to "C_CL bell 08" is defined.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the stop display (pull-in) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination defined in the priority "1" is displayed from the stop display of the other symbol combinations. Is also given priority.

[Search order table]
Next, the search sequence table will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search order”). ") Is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 104 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and corresponds to the search order “1”. Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces from the numerical value to be applied.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 20).

For example, when the symbol "red 7" is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, in the storage areas 1 to 42 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (red 7) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the displayable internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 64 described later) described later.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. Although description is omitted here (not shown), the main RAM 53 also stores storage areas such as random values for effects, various control data, various flags, and various counters used in various reel effects and random acceleration processes described later. Provided.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 42 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 42, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 42, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area stores the game state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the present embodiment, the RT state type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the current RT state is the RT7 state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 51 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2-43) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 43.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 59), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Symbol stop position storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol stop position storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 65. In the symbol stop position storage area, the symbol position of each reel stopped and displayed on the effective line (center line) is stored for each unit game.

For example, when the symbol combination (“clown”-“clown”-“apple 1”) related to “C_PB Lip 02” is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 65, the left reel in the symbol stop position storage area. The symbol position "13" is stored in the storage area corresponding to 3L, the symbol position "14" is stored in the storage area corresponding to the middle reel 3C, and the symbol position "1" is stored in the storage area corresponding to the right reel 3R. Is stored.

[Pull-in priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 66. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 57) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority. On the other hand, the pull-in priority data having the lowest priority is prohibited from stopping.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined in the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 58).

Although detailed description is omitted in the present specification, the sub ROM 82 also stores various table data (for example, a navigation table) required for various production operations, and the sub RAM 83 also has various storage areas required. Is provided as appropriate.

<RT state transition flow>
Here, the transition flow of the RT state and the characteristics of each RT state will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 67. Further, in FIG. 67, in addition to the transition flow of the RT state, the transition flow of the gaming state such as “normal state” and “pseudo bonus” is also shown.

[Relationship between RT state and game state]
In the present embodiment, as described in the RT transition table of FIG. 21, eight types of RT states, RT0 state to RT7 state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided as RT states. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 67, in the present embodiment, the gaming state is different for each RT state.

Specifically, the RT0 state corresponds to the RT state set when the pachislot machine 1 is activated, and the state of the game performed at this time is referred to as an "initial state" (general game). In the RT1 state, a game similar to a general game is performed in appearance, and here, the game state at this time is referred to as a "normal state".
In the RT2 state, a game in which the transition role (replay role) to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART) described later wins with a high probability is performed, and here, the game state at this time is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus high-probability state". ..

In the RT3 state, there is a high probability that the replay combination (transition role to the "pseudo-bonus" described later) related to "C_BB Lip 01" to "C_BB Lip 13" described in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 20) will win. The game to be played is performed, and here, the game state at this time is referred to as "between pseudo BB flags". In the RT4 state, the replay combination (transition role to the "pseudo-bonus" described later) related to "C_RB Lip 01" to "C_RB Lip 13" described in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 20) is likely to win. The game to be played is performed, and here, the game state at this time is referred to as "between pseudo RB flags".

In the RT5 state, the ART function operates to perform a game that is advantageous to the player, and here, the game state at this time is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus". In the RT6 state, mainly in the "pseudo-bonus", when the replay role related to "replay 4" described later wins a prize and the game state falls from the "pseudo-bonus", the game state is changed to the "pseudo-bonus" again. The game to return to is performed, and here, the game state at this time is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus relief state".

Further, in the RT7 state, a game in which the replay combination wins with a high probability is performed. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the play combination wins a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in succession in the RT0 state, the RT1 state, and the RT7 state, the RT state is shifted to the "pseudo bonus". Navi to shift to the RT2 state with high probability. Therefore, the RT7 state is a state in which the replay combination wins a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in a row, and the transition to the "pseudo-bonus" is easily confirmed. ".

Further, in the following, in the "initial state" (RT0 state), "normal state" (RT1 state), and "chance zone" (RT7 state), games that are apparently similar to general games are performed. The states are also collectively referred to as "normal game state". In the present embodiment, in the game of the "normal game state", when the stop operation is performed by irregular pressing, a penalty (for example, ART does not win, navigation does not operate, etc.) is given.

In addition, in the "pseudo-bonus high probability state" (RT2 state), "pseudo-BB flag interval" (RT3 state), and "pseudo-RB flag interval" (RT4 state), a game with a high probability of transition to the "pseudo-bonus" is performed. Therefore, these gaming states are also collectively referred to as "ART preparation state". Furthermore, since both the "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state) and the "pseudo-bonus relief state" (RT6 state) are gaming states in which ART operates with a high probability, these gaming states are collectively referred to as the "ART state" (ART6 state). Also called a special game state). Hereinafter, the game content of each RT state (game state) will be described in more detail.

[RT0 state (initial state)]
As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, among various winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) in which a lottery value larger than 0 is specified in the RT0 state column, the replay winning combination and RT The winning numbers corresponding to the roles that trigger the transition of the state are "1" (abbreviation "F_lip 0") and "40" to "51" (abbreviation "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right", respectively. S bell 4 ").

The combination corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip 0" (win number "1") is a replay combination defined as "C_normal lip 01" to "C_normal lip 24" in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20. Is. In the following, these replay combinations corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip 0" will be referred to as "replay 0".

"Replay 0" is a replay combination that does not change the RT state. Therefore, as shown in the RT transition table of FIG. 21, the winning of "Replay 0" (display of the symbol combination of "Replay 0") does not trigger the transition of the RT state. In the RT0 state, the lottery value of the replay combination is defined only in the column corresponding to "replay 0", and only "replay 0" is the lottery target of the replay combination.

Further, the roles corresponding to the abbreviations "F_left S-bell 1" to "F_right S-bell 4" (win numbers "40" to "51") are the "R_RT1 transition" in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20. It is a role defined as "1" to "R_RT1 transition 32". In the following, these roles corresponding to the abbreviations "F_left S-bell 1" to "F_right S-bell 4" will be referred to as "special bell torikoboshi". In the present embodiment, the "special bell spill" is a role that triggers the transition to the RT state regardless of the RT state, and the symbol combination of the "special bell spill" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (center line). If this is done, the RT state shifts to the RT1 state (if the current RT state is the RT1 state, the RT1 state is maintained).

Therefore, in the RT0 state, when the symbol combination of "Replay 0" is displayed on the valid line (when "Replay 0" wins a prize), the RT state is maintained in the RT0 state. On the other hand, in the RT0 state, when the symbol combination of "Special Bell Torikoboshi" is displayed on the valid line (when "Special Bell Torikoboshi" wins a prize), the RT state shifts from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. (See FIG. 21).

[RT1 state (normal state)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT1 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the column of the RT1 state, the lottery value related to the replay combination is abbreviated as "F_lip G1A", "F_lip G1B", "F_lip G2A", "F_lip". It is specified in the column corresponding to "G2B", "F_lip G8_1XXXA" to "F_lip G8_XX1", and "F_lip G9" (win numbers "2" to "5" and "22" to "30"). .. That is, in the RT1 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay defined by the small combination / replay data pointers "2" to "5" and "22" to "30" is the target of the replay combination.

As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT1 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G1A" and "F_lip G1B" (small combination / replay data pointers "2" and "3") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 26 to 36. As described above, it is a replay role related to "C_RT3 rip 01" to "C_RT3 rip 46" and "C_BB rip 01" to "C_BB rip 13". In the abbreviation "F_rip G1A" (small combination / replay data pointer "2"), the winning replay combination is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. Further, in the abbreviation "F_lip G1B" (small combination / replay data pointer "3"), in addition to the common replay combination described above, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is also duplicated. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G1A" and "F_lip G1B", it is different whether or not the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated in addition to the common replay combination.

In the following, the replay role related to "C_RT3 rip 01" to "C_RT3 rip 46" will be referred to as "replay 1", and the replay role related to "C_BB rip 01" to "C_BB rip 13" will be referred to as "replay B". Further, in the following, the group of replay roles related to "Replay 1" and "Replay B", which are commonly won in the abbreviation "F_Rip G1A" or "F_Rip G1B", will be referred to as "Replay G1".

Both "Replay 1" and "Replay B" serve as an opportunity to shift to the RT state, and when the symbol combination of "Replay B" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT5 state. On the other hand, "Replay 1" is a replay combination displayed when the symbol combination related to "Replay B" cannot be displayed (when "Replay B" is missed), and the symbol combination related to "Replay 1" is If it is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT3 state.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G2A" and "F_lip G2B" (small combination / replay data pointers "4" and "5") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 26 to 36. As described above, it is a replay role related to "C_RT4 rip 01" to "C_RT4 rip 42" and "C_RB rip 01" to "C_RB rip 13". In the abbreviation "F_rip G2A" (small combination / replay data pointer "4"), the winning replay combination is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. Further, in the abbreviation "F_lip G2B" (small combination / replay data pointer "5"), in addition to the common replay combination described above, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance rip 01" is also duplicated. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G2A" and "F_lip G2B", it is different whether or not the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated in addition to the common replay combination.

In the following, the replay role related to "C_RT4 rip 01" to "C_RT4 rip 46" will be referred to as "replay 2", and the replay role related to "C_RB rip 01" to "C_RB rip 13" will be referred to as "replay R". Further, in the following, the group of replay roles related to "Replay 2" and "Replay R", which are commonly won by the abbreviation "F_Rip G2A" or "F_Rip G2B", will be referred to as "Replay G2".

Both "Replay 2" and "Replay R" serve as an opportunity to shift to the RT state, and when the symbol combination related to "Replay R" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT5 state. On the other hand, "Replay 2" is a replay combination that is displayed when the symbol combination related to "Replay R" cannot be displayed (when "Replay R" is missed), and the symbol combination related to "Replay 2" is If it is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT4 state.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G8_1XXXA" to "F_lip G8_XX1" (small combination / replay data pointers "22" to "29") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 26 to 36. As described above, the replay role related to "C_RT6 rip 01" to "C_RT6 rip 16", "C_RT7 rip 01" to "C_RT7 rip 12" and "C_normal rip 01" to "C_normal rip 24" ("replay 0"). Is.

In the abbreviation "F_Rip G8_1XXXA" (small combination / replay data pointer "22"), the winning replay combination is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. In the abbreviation "F_lip G8_1XXB" (small combination / replay data pointer "23"), in addition to the common replay combination described above, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_lip G8_1XXXC" (small combination / replay data pointer "24"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 02" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_lip G8_213A" (small combination / replay data pointer "25"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 03" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_lip G8_213B" (small combination / replay data pointer "26"), in addition to the common replay combination described above, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 04" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_lip G8_231A" (small combination / replay data pointer "27"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 05" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_Rip G8_231B" (small role / replay data pointer "28"), in addition to the common replay role described above, the replay role related to "C_maintenance lip 01" and "C_maintenance lip 02" is duplicated. .. Then, in the abbreviation "F_lip G8_XX1" (small role / replay data pointer "29"), in addition to the common replay role described above, the replay roles related to "C_maintenance lip 01" and "C_maintenance lip 03" are duplicated. Win. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G8_1XXXA" to "F_lip G8_XX1", the types of replay roles related to the "maintenance lip" that are duplicated in addition to the common replay combination are different.

In the following, the replay role related to "C_RT6 rip 01" to "C_RT6 rip 16" will be referred to as "replay 4", and the replay role related to "C_RT7 rip 01" to "C_RT7 rip 12" will be referred to as "replay 8". Further, in the following, the group of replay roles related to "Replay 0", "Replay 4" and "Replay 8", which are common to the abbreviations "F_Rip G8_1XXXA" to "F_Rip G8_XX1", will be referred to as "Replay G8". To call.

Both "Replay 4" and "Replay 8" serve as an opportunity to shift to the RT state, and when the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT6 state. On the other hand, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 8" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT7 state.

The replay combinations corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip G9" (small combination / replay data pointer "30") are defined in the internal winning combination determination tables of FIGS. 26 to 36, and are defined in the internal winning combination determination tables "C_PB rip 01" to " It is a replay role related to "C_PB Lip 09" and "C_RT5 Lip 01" to "C_RT5 Lip 18". In the following, the replay role related to "C_PB Lip 01" to "C_PB Lip 09" will be referred to as "Replay P", and the replay role related to "C_RT5 Lip 01" to "C_RT5 Lip 18" will be referred to as "Replay 6". Further, in the following, the group of replay roles related to "Replay P" and "Replay 6", which are duplicated by the abbreviation "F_Rip G9", will be referred to as "Replay G9".

Both "Replay P" and "Replay 6" serve as an opportunity to shift to the RT state, and when the symbol combination related to "Replay P" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT5 state. If the symbol combination related to "Replay P" is not displayed (when it is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 6" is displayed, and the RT state shifts to the RT5 state.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combinations described above in the RT1 state will be described. As described above, in the RT1 state, the replay combination included in any of the replay combination groups of "replay G1", "replay G2", "replay G8", and "replay G9" is internally won.

Then, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, the winning probability (high probability) of the "replay G8" (abbreviated as "F_lip G8_1XXXA" to "F_lip G8_XX1") is "replay G1" or "replay". It is set to be higher than the winning probability (low probability) of "G2" (abbreviated as "F_lip G1A", "F_lip G1B", "F_lip G2A", "F_lip G2B"). Further, in the present embodiment, the winning probability (ultra-low probability) of "Replay G9" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G9") is "Replay G1" or "Replay G2" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G1A", "F_Rip G1B"). , "F_Rip G2A", "F_Rip G2B") are set to be lower than the winning probability (low probability).

(3) Transition operation of RT state and gaming state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT1 state as the transition source will be described. First, in the RT1 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G1" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 1" and "Replay B" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay B" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay B" wins), RT The state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the game state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo bonus". At this time, ART of 100 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay B" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay B" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 1" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 ”-“ Replay 1 ”etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT3 state, and the gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “pseudo BB flag”.

Next, in the RT1 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G2" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 2" and "Replay R" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay R" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"BAR", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay R" wins), the RT state Shifts from the RT1 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the game state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo bonus". At this time, ART of 50 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay R" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay R" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 2" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 "-" Bell 1 "etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT4 state, and the gaming state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo-RB flag interval".

Next, in the RT1 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G8" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 0", "Replay 4", and "Replay 8" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 0" (for example, "Replay 1"-"Replay 1"-"Replay 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the replay combination related to "Replay 0" wins a prize. Then), the RT state does not shift, and the RT1 state is maintained.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" (for example, "Bell 1"-"BAR"-"Bell 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay 4" wins a prize), The RT state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT6 state, and the gaming state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo-bonus relief state".

In the present embodiment, in the case of the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" (for example, "Bell 1"-"BAR"-"Bell 1", etc.), when the stop button is pressed forward (the left reel 3L is first stopped). The push order) is set to a symbol combination that makes it difficult to display the stop. Therefore, when displaying the symbol combination related to "Replay 4", it is necessary to navigate the push order of the stop button.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state falls from "between pseudo BB flags" or "between pseudo RB flags" to "normal state" and then wins the replay combination of "replay G8" in "normal state". Perform push order navigation to display the symbol combination related to "Replay 4". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" is displayed, the game state actually falls from "between pseudo BB flags" or "between pseudo RB flags" to "normal state". Limited to.

In addition, when the game state falls from "between pseudo BB flags" to "normal state", the symbol combination related to "replay 4" is displayed and the game state shifts to "pseudo bonus relief state" (ART state). Is given an ART of 100 games. In addition, when the game state falls from "between pseudo RB flags" to "normal state", the symbol combination related to "replay 4" is displayed and the game state shifts to "pseudo bonus relief state" (ART state). Is given an ART of 50 games.

Further, in the RT1 state, the replay combination related to "Replay G8" is won, and the symbol combination related to "Replay 8" (for example, "Bell 1"-"Replay 1"-"Apple 1", etc.) is stopped on the effective line. When it is displayed (when "Replay 8" wins a prize), the RT state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT7 state, and the gaming state shifts from the "normal state" to the "chance zone".

Next, in the RT1 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G9" is won, that is, the case where "Replay P" and "Replay 6" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay P" (for example, "Clown"-"Clown"-"Clown", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay P" wins), the RT state is changed. The RT1 state shifts to the RT5 state, and the gaming state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo-bonus". At this time, an ART of 250 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay P" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay P" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 6" (for example, "Clown"-"Bell") 1 ”-“ Apple 1 ”etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT5 state, and the gaming state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo-bonus". At this time, an ART of 250 games is given. That is, in the RT1 state, when the replay role of "Replay G9" is won, the game state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo-bonus" regardless of the displayed replay role, and the ART of 250 games is set. Granted.

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") is won in the RT1 state. In this case, in the RT1 state, when the symbol combination related to "special bell missed" (for example, "bell 1"-"bell 1"-"apple 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line ("special bell missed"). (When a prize is won), the RT state does not shift, the RT1 state is maintained, and the gaming state is also maintained in the "normal state".

[RT2 state (pseudo-bonus high probability state)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT2 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the column of the RT2 state, the lottery value related to the replay combination is abbreviated as "F_lip G1A", "F_lip G1B", "F_lip G2A", "F_lip". It is specified in the column corresponding to "G2B" and "F_lip G7_123" to "F_lip G7_321" (win numbers "2" to "5" and "17" to "21"). That is, in the RT2 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay defined by the small combination / replay data pointers "2" to "5" and "17" to "21" is the target of the replay combination.

As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT2 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G7_123" to "F_lip G7_321" (small combination / replay data pointers "17" to "21") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 26 to 36. As described above, it is a replay combination related to "C_RT1 rip 01" to "C_RT1 rip 08" and "C_RT2 rip 01" to "C_RT2 rip 08".

In the abbreviation "F_Rip G7_123" (small combination / replay data pointer "17"), the winning replay combination is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. In the abbreviation "F_lip G7_132" (small combination / replay data pointer "18"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_lip G7_2XX" (small combination / replay data pointer "19"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 02" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_lip G7_312" (small combination / replay data pointer "20"), in addition to the common replay combination described above, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 03" is duplicated. Then, in the abbreviation "F_lip G7_321" (small combination / replay data pointer "21"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 04" is duplicated. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G7_123" to "F_lip G7_321", the types of replay roles related to the "maintenance lip" that are duplicated in addition to the common replay combination are different.

In the following, the replay combination related to "C_RT1 rip 01" to "C_RT1 rip 08" will be referred to as "replay 5", and the replay combination related to "C_RT2 rip 01" to "C_RT2 rip 08" will be referred to as "replay 3". Further, in the following, the abbreviations "F_rip G7_123" to "F_rip G7_321" (small role / replay data pointers "17" to "21") are commonly referred to as "replay 3" and "replay 5". The group of such replay roles is referred to as "replay G7".

Both "Replay 3" and "Replay 5" serve as an opportunity to shift to the RT state, and when the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. However, in the RT2 state, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is displayed, the RT2 state is maintained. Further, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 5" is displayed, the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combinations described above in the RT2 state will be described. As described above, in the RT2 state, the replay combination included in any of the replay combination groups of "replay G1", "replay G2", and "replay G7" is internally won.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. 22 to 24, "Replay G1" (abbreviated as "F_lip G1A" and "F_lip G1B") and "Replay G2" defined in the RT2 state column. (Abbreviations "F_lip G2A" and "F_lip G2B") and "Replay G7" (abbreviations "F_lip G7_123" to "F_lip G7_321") are set to relatively large values. That is, in the RT2 state, the winning probabilities of any of "Replay G1", "Replay G2", and "Replay G7" are set to be high.

(3) Transition operation of RT state and gaming state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT2 state as the transition source will be described. First, in the RT2 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G1" is won, that is, the case where the replay combination related to "Replay 1" and "Replay B" is duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay B" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay B" wins), RT The state shifts from the RT2 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the "pseudo-bonus high-probability state" to the "pseudo-bonus". At this time, ART of 100 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay B" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay B" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 1" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 ”-“ Replay 1 ”etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT2 state to the RT3 state, and the gaming state shifts from the “pseudo-bonus high-probability state” to the “pseudo-BB flag”.

Next, in the RT2 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G2" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 2" and "Replay R" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay R" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"BAR", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay R" wins), the RT state Shifts from the RT2 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the "pseudo-bonus high-probability state" to the "pseudo-bonus". At this time, ART of 50 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay R" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay R" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 2" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 "-" Bell 1 "etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT2 state to the RT4 state, and the gaming state shifts from the “pseudo-bonus high-probability state” to the “pseudo-RB flag”.

Next, in the RT2 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G7" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 3" and "Replay 5" are duplicated. In this case, in the present embodiment, the stop button pressing order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift (fall) to the RT1 state.

Specifically, in the RT2 state, when the replay combination of "Replay G7" is won, the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the symbol combination related to "Replay 5"). Push order navigation is performed (so that is not displayed as a stop on the valid line). In this push order navigation, five push orders are notified. Then, when the player presses the stop button according to the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (in the case of the correct push order), the RT2 state is maintained. The "pseudo-bonus high-probability state" is also maintained in the game state.

However, if the player does not follow the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is not stopped and displayed on the valid line (in the case of an incorrect push order answer), the symbol combination related to "Replay 5" is not displayed. Is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT2 state to the RT1 state. That is, the gaming state falls from the "pseudo-bonus high probability state" to the "normal state".

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") is won in the RT2 state. In this case, in the RT2 state, the push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to "special bell missed" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. That is, also in this case, the push order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift (fall) to the RT1 state.

However, if the player presses the stop button without following the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "special bell missed" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (in the case of incorrect push order), RT The state shifts to the RT1 state. That is, the gaming state falls from the "pseudo-bonus high probability state" to the "normal state".

[RT3 state (between pseudo BB flags)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT3 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the RT3 state column, the lottery value related to the replay combination is defined in the column corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip G1B" (win number "3"). .. That is, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay combination (“Replay 1” and “Replay B” included in “Replay G1”) defined by the small combination / replay data pointer “3” is the replay role. It is subject to lottery.

As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT3 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combination described above in the RT3 state will be described. As described above, in the RT3 state, the replay combination (“Replay 1” and “Replay B”) included in the replay combination group of “Replay G1” is internally won.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery value of the abbreviation "F_lip G1B" defined in the RT3 state column is set to a large value. That is, in the RT3 state, the winning probability of "Replay G1" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G1B") is set to be high.

(3) Transition operation of RT state and gaming state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT3 state as the transition source will be described. First, in the RT3 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G1" is won, that is, the case where the replay combination related to "Replay 1" and "Replay B" is duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay B" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay B" wins), RT The state shifts from the RT3 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the game state shifts from "between pseudo BB flags" to "pseudo bonus". At this time, ART of 100 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay B" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay B" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 1" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 ”-“ Replay 1 ”etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT3 state is maintained, and the game state is also maintained as "between pseudo BB flags".

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") is won in the RT3 state. In this case, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "special bell missed" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. That is, in the RT3 state, when the "special bell missed" is won, the push order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift (fall) to the RT1 state.

However, if the player presses the stop button without following the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "special bell missed" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (in the case of incorrect push order), RT The state shifts from the RT3 state to the RT1 state. That is, the game state falls from "between pseudo BB flags" to "normal state".

[RT4 state (between pseudo RB flags)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT4 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the column of the RT4 state, the lottery value related to the replay combination is defined in the column corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip G2B" (win number "5"). .. That is, in the RT4 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay combination (“Replay 2” and “Replay R” included in “Replay G2”) defined by the small combination / replay data pointer “5” is the replay role. It is subject to lottery.

As shown in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT4 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combination described above in the RT4 state will be described. As described above, in the RT4 state, the replay combination (“Replay 2” and “Replay R”) included in the replay combination group of “Replay G2” is internally won.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery value of the abbreviation "F_lip G2B" defined in the RT4 state column is set to a large value. That is, in the RT4 state, the winning probability of "Replay G2" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G2B") is set to be high.

(3) Transition operation of RT state and gaming state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT4 state as the transition source will be described. First, in the RT4 state, consider the case where the replay role of "Replay G2" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G2B") is won, that is, the case where "Replay 2" and "Replay R" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination of the replay combination related to "Replay R" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"BAR", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay R" wins a prize). , The RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the game state shifts from "between pseudo RB flags" to "pseudo bonus". At this time, ART of 50 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay R" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay R" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 2" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 "-" Bell 1 "etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this case, the RT4 state is maintained, and the game state is also maintained as "between pseudo RB flags".

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") is won in the RT4 state. In this case, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "special bell missed" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. That is, in the RT4 state, when the "special bell missed" is won, the push order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift (fall) to the RT1 state.

However, if the player presses the stop button without following the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "special bell missed" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (in the case of incorrect push order), RT The state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. That is, the game state falls from "between pseudo RB flags" to "normal state".

[RT5 state (pseudo bonus)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT5 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the column of the RT5 state, the lottery value related to the replay combination is abbreviated as "F_lip 0", "F_lip G4_L" to "F_lip G4_R", "F_lip". It is specified in the column corresponding to "G6" and "F_lip G9" (win numbers "1", "10" to "12", "16" and "30"). That is, in the RT5 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay defined by the small combination / replay data pointers "1", "10" to "12", "16", and "30" is the target of the replay combination. Become.

As shown in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT5 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G4_L" to "F_lip G4_R" (small combination / replay data pointers "10" to "12") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 26 to 36. As described above, it is a replay role related to "C_RT6 rip 01" to "C_RT6 rip 16" and "C_normal rip 01" to "C_normal rip 24". That is, the abbreviations "F_lip G4_L" to "F_lip G4_R" are common to "replay 0" ("C_normal lip 01" to "C_normal lip 24") and "replay 4" ("C_RT6 lip 01" to "". C_RT6 Lip 16 ") wins more than once. In the following, the group of replay roles related to the duplicate winning "Replay 0" and "Replay 4" will be referred to as "Replay G4".

The replay combination that is won in the abbreviation "F_rip G4_L" (small combination / replay data pointer "10") is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. In the abbreviation "F_lip G4_C" (small combination / replay data pointer "11"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated. Then, in the abbreviation "F_lip G4_R" (small combination / replay data pointer "12"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 02" is duplicated. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G4_L" to "F_lip G4_R", the type of replay combination related to the "maintenance lip" that is duplicated in addition to the common replay combination is different.

The replay roles corresponding to the abbreviation "F_lip G6" (small role / replay data pointer "16") are "C_BB lip 01", "C_maintenance lip 01" to "C_maintenance lip 05", and "C_normal". It is a replay role related to "Rip 01" to "C_Normal Lip 24". In the following, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" to "C_maintenance lip 05" will be referred to as "replay 7".

That is, in the abbreviation "F_Rip G6" (small role / replay data pointer "16"), "Replay 0", "Replay 7", and "Replay B" are duplicated. However, regarding "Replay B", only the replay role related to "C_BB Lip 01" whose symbol combination is "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" ("Red 7 match") wins. Further, in the following, the group of replay roles related to these duplicate winning "replay 0", "replay 7" and "replay B" will be referred to as "replay G6".

In addition, "Replay 7" is a role displayed when the symbol combination related to "Replay B" ("C_BB Lip 01") cannot be displayed on the effective line in the RT5 state, and is displayed in "Replay 7". When such a symbol combination is displayed, the RT state is not changed.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combinations described above in the RT5 state will be described. As described above, in the RT5 state, it is included in any one of "Replay 0" (abbreviation "F_lip 0"), "Replay G4", "Replay G6" and "Replay G9" (abbreviation "F_lip G9"). The replay role wins internally.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery value of the abbreviation "F_lip 0" defined in the RT5 state column is set to a large value. That is, in the RT5 state, although not shown in FIG. 67, the winning probability of "replay 0" (abbreviated as "F_rip 0") is set to be high. Further, the lottery values of the abbreviations "F_lip G4_L" to "F_lip G4_R" defined in the RT5 state column are also set to relatively large values. That is, in the RT5 state, the winning probability of "Replay G4" is set to be high.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery values of the abbreviations "F_lip G6" and "F_lip G9" defined in the RT5 state column are "replay G4". It is set to a value much smaller than that of. That is, in the RT5 state, the winning probabilities of "Replay G6" and "Replay G9" are both set to be ultra-low probabilities.

(3) Transition operation of RT state and game state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT5 state as the transition source will be described. First, consider the case where "Replay 0" is won in the RT5 state.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 0" (for example, "Replay 1"-"Replay 1"-"Replay 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay 0" wins), RT5 The state is maintained, and the "pseudo bonus" is also maintained in the game state.

Next, in the RT5 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G4" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 0" and "Replay 4" are duplicated.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Replay 0" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (so that the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line). Is done. That is, the stop button pressing order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift to the RT6 state. In this push order navigation, three push orders are notified. Then, when the player presses the stop button according to the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 0" is stopped and displayed on the valid line (in the case of the correct push order), the RT5 state is maintained. The "pseudo-bonus" is maintained even in the game state.

However, if the player does not follow the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 0" is not stopped and displayed on the valid line (in the case of an incorrect push order answer), the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" is not displayed. Is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT5 state to the RT6 state. That is, the gaming state shifts from the "pseudo-bonus" to the "pseudo-bonus relief state".

In the present embodiment, even when all the small winning combinations related to the "bell" are won in the RT5 state, the push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Will be.

Next, in the RT5 state, when the replay role of "Replay G6" is won, that is, when "Replay 0", "Replay 7" and "Replay B" (abbreviated as "C_BB Lip 01" only) are duplicated. Think.

In this case, when the symbol combination ("Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7") related to "Replay B" (abbreviated as "C_BB Lip 01") is stopped and displayed on the valid line ("Replay B"). (When a prize is won), the RT5 state is maintained, and the game state is also maintained as a "pseudo bonus".

On the other hand, when the symbol combination ("Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7") related to "Replay B" (abbreviated as "C_BB Lip 01") cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line ("Replay B"). (If you miss), the symbol combination related to "Replay 0" (for example, "Replay 1"-"Replay 1"-"Replay 1", etc.) or the symbol combination related to "Replay 7" (for example, "Red 7"-" "Red 7"-"Apple 1" etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In any of these cases, the RT5 state is maintained, and the "pseudo-bonus" is also maintained in the gaming state. That is, when the replay combination of "Replay G6" is won in the RT5 state, the "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state) is maintained regardless of the type of the displayed replay combination.

Next, in the RT5 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G9" is won, that is, the case where "Replay P" and "Replay 6" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay P" (for example, "Clown"-"Clown"-"Clown", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay P" wins), the RT5 state is changed. It is maintained, and the game state is also maintained as a "pseudo bonus".

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay P" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay P" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 6" (for example, "Apple 1"-" "Bell 1"-"Apple 1" etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when the replay role related to "Replay 6" wins). In this case, the RT5 state is maintained, and the "pseudo-bonus" is also maintained in the gaming state. That is, in the RT5 state, when the replay combination of the "replay G9" is won, the "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state) is maintained regardless of the type of the displayed replay combination.

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") wins in the RT5 state. In this case, in the RT5 state, when the symbol combination related to "special bell missed" (for example, "bell 1"-"bell 1"-"apple 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line ("special bell missed"). When the replay combination related to "" is won), the RT state shifts from the RT5 state to the RT1 state. That is, the game state falls from the "pseudo bonus" to the "normal state".

[RT6 state (pseudo bonus relief state)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT6 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the column of the RT6 state, the lottery value related to the replay combination is abbreviated as "F_lip G5_213" to "F_lip G5_XX1" (win numbers "13" to "15"). ) Corresponds to the column. That is, in the RT6 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay defined by the small combination / replay data pointers "13" to "15" is the target of the replay combination.

As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT6 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G5_213" to "F_lip G5_XX1" (small combination / replay data pointers "13" to "15") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 26 to 36. As described above, it is a replay role related to "C_RT1 rip 01" to "C_RT1 rip 08" and "C_RT5 rip 01" to "C_RT5 rip 18". That is, in the abbreviations "F_lip G5_213" to "F_lip G5_XX1", "replay 5" and "replay 6" are commonly won. In the following, the group of replay roles related to the duplicate winning "Replay 5" and "Replay 6" will be referred to as "Replay G5".

In the abbreviation "F_rip G5_213" (small combination / replay data pointer "13"), the winning replay combination is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. In the abbreviation "F_lip G5_231" (small combination / replay data pointer "14"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated. Then, in the abbreviation "F_lip G5_XX1" (small combination / replay data pointer "15"), in addition to the common replay combination described above, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 02" is duplicated. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G5_213" to "F_lip G5_XX1", the types of replay roles related to the "maintenance lip" that are duplicated in addition to the common replay combination are different.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combinations described above in the RT6 state will be described. As described above, in the RT6 state, it is included in any of "Replay 5"("C_RT1 rip 01" to "C_RT5 rip 08") and "Replay 6"("C_RT5 rip 01" to "C_RT5 rip 18"). The replay role wins internally.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, the lottery values of the abbreviations "F_lip G5_213" to "F_lip G5_XX1" defined in the RT6 state column are set to relatively large values. Has been done. That is, in the RT6 state, the winning probability of "Replay G5" is set to be high.

(3) Transition operation of RT state and game state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT6 state as the transition source will be described. First, consider the case where the replay role of "Replay G5" is won in the RT6 state.

In this case, when the gaming state is the state during the ART gaming period (for example, when the gaming state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" of the "pseudo-bonus" during the ART operation), it is set to "replay 6". Push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line. That is, the stop button pressing order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state. In this push order navigation, three push orders are notified. Then, when the player presses the stop button according to the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 6" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (in the case of the correct push order), the RT state is changed from the RT6 state. The RT5 state shifts. That is, the gaming state shifts from the "pseudo-bonus relief state" to the "pseudo-bonus".

However, if the player does not follow the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 6" is not stopped and displayed on the valid line (in the case of an incorrect push order answer), the symbol combination related to "Replay 5" is not displayed. Is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT6 state to the RT1 state. That is, the game state falls from the "pseudo bonus relief state" to the "normal state".

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") is won in the RT6 state. In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Special Bell Missing" (for example, "Bell 1"-"Bell 1"-"Apple 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line ("Special Bell Missing" wins a prize. ), The RT state shifts from the RT6 state to the RT1 state. That is, the gaming state falls from the "pseudo-bonus relief state" (ART state) to the "normal state".

[RT7 state (chance zone)]
(1) Types of Internal Winning Replay Combinations First, the types of internal winning replay combinations in the RT7 state will be described. As shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, in the column of the RT7 state, the lottery value related to the replay combination is abbreviated as "F_lip G1A", "F_lip G1B", "F_lip G2A", "F_lip". It is specified in the column corresponding to "G2B", "F_lip G3_213" to "F_lip G3_321", and "F_lip G9" (win numbers "2" to "9" and "30"). That is, in the RT7 state, the internal winning combination related to the replay defined by the small combination / replay data pointers "2" to "9" and "30" is the target of the replay combination.

As shown in the internal lottery tables of FIGS. 22 to 24, even in the RT7 state, the “special bell missed” (abbreviated as “F_left S bell 1” to “F_right S bell 4”” that triggers the transition to the RT state. The lottery value is specified in the column of), and "special bell missed" is also subject to lottery.

The replay combination common to the abbreviations "F_lip G3_213" to "F_lip G3_321" (small combination / replay data pointers "6" to "9") is defined in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 26 to 36. As shown above, it is a replay role related to "C_RT1 rip 01" to "C_RT1 rip 08", "C_RT2 rip 01" to "C_RT2 rip 08", and "C_normal rip 01" to "C_normal rip 24". That is, in the abbreviations "F_lip G3_213" to "F_lip G3_321", "replay 5", "replay 3", and "replay 0" are duplicated. In the following, the group of replay roles related to the duplicate winning "Replay 5", "Replay 3" and "Replay 0" will be referred to as "Replay G3".

In the abbreviation "F_Rip G3_213" (small combination / replay data pointer "6"), the winning replay combination is only the above-mentioned common replay combination. In the abbreviation "F_lip G3_231" (small combination / replay data pointer "7"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 01" is duplicated. In the abbreviation "F_Rip G3_312" (small role / replay data pointer "8"), in addition to the common replay role described above, replays related to "C_maintenance rip 02" and "C_RT5 rip 01" to "C_RT5 rip 18" The roles are duplicated. Then, in the abbreviation "F_lip G3_321" (small combination / replay data pointer "9"), in addition to the above-mentioned common replay combination, the replay combination related to "C_maintenance lip 03" is duplicated. That is, between the abbreviations "F_lip G3_213" to "F_lip G3_321", the types of replay roles related to the "maintenance lip" that is duplicated in addition to the common replay combination are mainly different.

(2) Winning Probability of Replay Combination Next, the winning probability of the various replay combination described above in the RT7 state will be described. As described above, in the RT7 state, the replay combination included in any of the replay combination groups of "replay G1", "replay G2", "replay G3", and "replay G9" is internally won.

Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24, the winning probability (high probability) of the "replay G3" (abbreviated as "F_lip G3_213" to "F_lip G3_321") is "replay". It is set to be higher than the winning probability (medium probability) of "G1" or "Replay G2" (abbreviated as "F_lip G1A", "F_lip G1B", "F_lip G2A", "F_lip G2B"). Further, in the present embodiment, the winning probability (ultra-low probability) of "Replay G9" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G9") is "Replay G1" or "Replay G2" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G1A", "F_Rip G1B"). , "F_Rip G2A", "F_Rip G2B") are set to be lower than the winning probability (medium probability).

(3) Transition operation of RT state and gaming state Next, the transition operation of the RT state with the RT7 state as the transition source will be described. First, in the RT7 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G1" is won, that is, the case where the replay combination related to "Replay 1" and "Replay B" is duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay B" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay B" wins), RT The state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the game state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "pseudo bonus". At this time, ART of 100 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay B" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay B" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 1" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 ”-“ Replay 1 ”etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT3 state, and the gaming state shifts from the “chance zone” to the “pseudo BB flag”.

Next, in the RT7 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G2" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 2" and "Replay R" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay R" (for example, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"BAR", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay R" wins), the RT state Shifts from the RT7 state to the RT5 state. As a result, the game state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "pseudo bonus". At this time, ART of 50 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay R" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay R" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 2" (for example, "Red 7"-" Red 7 "-" Bell 1 "etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT4 state, and the gaming state also shifts from the “chance zone” to the “pseudo RB flag”.

Next, in the RT7 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G3" is won, that is, the case where "Replay 0", "Replay 3" and "Replay 5" are duplicated.

In this case, when the stop button is pressed forward, the symbol combination related to "replay 0" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the RT7 state is maintained, and the game state is also maintained in the "chance zone". On the other hand, when the stop button is pressed irregularly, the push order navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this push order navigation, four push orders are notified. That is, the stop button pressing order navigation is performed so that the RT state does not shift from the RT7 state to the RT1 state. Then, when the player presses the stop button according to the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is stopped and displayed on the effective line (in the case of the correct push order), the RT state is changed from the RT7 state. The RT2 state shifts. That is, the gaming state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "pseudo-bonus high probability state".

However, if the player does not follow the push order navigation and the symbol combination related to "Replay 3" is not stopped and displayed on the valid line (in the case of an incorrect push order answer), the symbol combination related to "Replay 5" is not displayed. Is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT1 state. That is, the game state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "normal state".

Next, in the RT7 state, consider the case where the replay combination of "Replay G9" is won, that is, the case where "Replay P" and "Replay 6" are duplicated.

In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Replay P" (for example, "Clown"-"Clown"-"Clown", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when "Replay P" wins), the RT state is changed. It shifts from the RT7 state to the RT5 state. That is, the game state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "pseudo bonus". At this time, an ART of 250 games is given.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination related to "Replay P" cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when "Replay P" is missed), the symbol combination related to "Replay 6" is related to the symbol combination "Replay P". (For example, "Apple 1"-"Bell 1"-"Apple 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the replay combination related to "Replay 6" wins a prize). In this case, the RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT5 state, and the gaming state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "pseudo bonus". At this time, an ART of 250 games is given. That is, in the RT7 state, when the replay combination of "Replay G9" is won, the game state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "pseudo-bonus" regardless of the displayed replay combination.

Next, consider the case where the "special bell missed" (abbreviated as "F_left S bell 1" to "F_right S bell 4") wins in the RT7 state. In this case, when the symbol combination related to "Special Bell Missing" (for example, "Bell 1"-"Bell 1"-"Apple 1", etc.) is stopped and displayed on the valid line ("Special Bell Missing" wins a prize. ), The RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT1 state. That is, the gaming state shifts from the "chance zone" to the "normal state".

[Correspondence table between RT state and game state]
FIG. 68 shows the correspondence between the RT state and the gaming state described in the transition flow of the RT state of FIG. 67. In the correspondence table shown in FIG. 68, a circle is shown in the column of the RT state corresponding to each game state.

In addition, since the "general game state" in FIG. 68 means to include the "initial state" and the "normal state", in FIG. 68, the RT0 state and the RT1 state are marked with a circle. Since the "ART state" in FIG. 68 means to include the "pseudo-bonus" in the RT5 state and the "pseudo-bonus relief state" in the RT6 state, the RT5 state and the RT6 state are marked with a circle in FIG. 68. There is.

Further, the "ART end state (AT non-operating state)" in FIG. 68 is a gaming state in which the ART game (AT function) is completed and only the high RT function (RT5 or RT6 state) is operating. Is shown. Therefore, in the "ART end state (AT non-operating state)" in FIG. 68, the RT5 state and the RT6 state are marked with a circle.

<Counting function for the number of continuous replay winnings (operations)>
[Overview of the count function for the number of consecutive replay prizes]
The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of counting the number of consecutive replay winnings in the "normal gaming state". Then, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination wins (operates) continuously for a predetermined number of times, the transition probability to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state) becomes high in the "pseudo-bonus high probability state" (RT2 state). Navigating to shift the game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the "normal game state", when the replay combination wins (operates) continuously for a predetermined number of times, the transition to the "ART state" is substantially confirmed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination is counted by the replay counter in the "normal game state". The replay role counted here is a replay role included in the replay role group of "replay G1", "replay G2", "replay G3", "replay G8", and "replay G9". Next, the lottery table of the AT for shifting the RT state to the RT2 state is referred to, and a lottery for whether or not to operate the AT is performed based on the value of the replay counter. Then, when the AT lottery is won, the transition navigation (AT) to the RT2 state is activated, and the transition of the gaming state from the "normal gaming state" to the "pseudo-bonus high probability state" becomes possible. As a result, the probability of transition to the "pseudo-bonus" increases.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the value of the replay counter (the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination) reaches a predetermined number of times, there is a 100% probability that the transition navigation (AT) to the RT2 state will win the AT. The lottery value of the lottery table is set. Further, in the present embodiment, three types of modes in which the probabilities of winning the AT lottery performed at the time of continuous replay winning described above are different from each other are prepared. Specifically, three types of modes, "normal mode", "high accuracy mode" and "ultra high accuracy mode", are prepared. Then, in the present embodiment, a predetermined mode is selected (set) by lottery.

In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process at the time of continuous winning of the replay and the management of the value of the replay counter (the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination) are performed by the sub-control circuit 42 as described later. Therefore, various table data and a replay counter, which will be described later, necessary for the AT lottery process at the time of continuous replay winning are provided in the sub control circuit 42. Further, the value of the replay counter is cleared when the RT state is a state other than the RT0 state, the RT1 state, and the RT7 state.

[Mode lottery table]
Next, the mode lottery table used in the mode lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. Note that FIG. 69 shows a mode in which the relationship between each mode (“normal mode”, “high probability mode”, and “ultra high probability mode”) and the corresponding lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6). It is a lottery table, and FIG. 70 is a table showing the lottery values defined in FIG. 69 with the winning probability (% display). The mode lottery table shown in FIG. 69 is actually stored in the sub ROM 82 of the sub control circuit 42.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the mode lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value is set so that the "ultra-high accuracy mode" can be easily won when the set numerical value (1 to 6) becomes large. ing.

[Overview of mode lottery processing]
In the mode lottery process using the mode lottery table of FIG. 69, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 127 in this embodiment) is defined corresponding to each mode. Subtract by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (a "digit" occurs) in a predetermined mode, it means that the mode has been won.

In the present embodiment, this mode lottery process is performed when the game state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state). Then, the information regarding the type of the mode determined at this time (winning) shifts to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state) again after the ART ends (after shifting to the "normal gaming state"). Is retained until.

The timing of the mode lottery process (transition trigger) is not limited to this example, and is performed, for example, at the end of the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state) (when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the pseudo-bonus end command). You may. Further, the end trigger of the mode once held is not limited to this example. For example, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games) have elapsed after the end of the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state), the mode end trigger (transition trigger) may be used. In this case, the mode may be set to the "normal mode" regardless of the current mode without performing the mode lottery.

[AT lottery table at the time of continuous replay winning]
Next, the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of replays used in the AT lottery processing at the time of continuous winning of replays (operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. In the AT lottery table for continuous winning of replays in FIG. 71, the relationship between each value of the replay counter ("2" to "5") and the lottery value of the transition navigation winning to the RT2 state is defined for each mode. There is. Further, FIG. 72 is a table showing the lottery values defined in FIG. 71 with the winning probability (% display). What is actually stored in the sub ROM 82 of the sub control circuit 42 is the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of replay shown in FIG. 71.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, in the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of the replay of the present embodiment, the lottery value increases as the value of the replay counter increases (the probability of winning the navigation to the RT2 state increases). .. Then, in the "normal mode" and the "high accuracy mode", when the value of the replay counter is "5" (when the replay combination is activated five times in a row), the winning probability of the transition navigation to the RT2 state is 100. %become. Further, in the "ultra-high accuracy mode", when the value of the replay counter is "4" (when the replay combination is activated four times in a row), the winning probability of the transition navigation to the RT2 state becomes 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the mode is the "normal mode" or the "high accuracy mode", when the replay combination is activated five times in a row in the "normal game state", the granting of ART is substantially confirmed. .. Further, when the mode is the "ultra-high accuracy mode", when the replay combination is operated four times in a row in the "normal game state", the granting of ART is substantially confirmed.

[Outline of AT lottery processing at the time of continuous replay winning]
In the present embodiment, in the AT lottery process using the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of the replay of FIG. 71, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 255 in the present embodiment) is set. Subtract by the lottery value specified according to the current mode and the value of the replay counter. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the transition navigation to the RT2 state has been won.

In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process at the time of continuous winning of the replay described above is performed in the normal game state process described later (see FIG. 117 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 81, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. For example, the AT lottery process at the time of continuous winning of replays and the management of the value of the replay counter (the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination) may be performed by the main control circuit 41. The specific processing in this case will be described in Modification 4 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example of shifting the game state to the "pseudo-bonus high probability state" (RT2 state) when the replay combination wins (operates) continuously for a predetermined number of times in the "normal game state" will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the "normal game state", when the replay combination wins a predetermined number of times in a row, the navigation is performed so that the game state is directly changed from the "normal game state" to the "ART state" (RT5 or RT6 state). You may. Then, when the game state shifts to the "ART state", a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7") is specified in the reel acceleration process at the start of the ART game. The reel effect to be displayed on the line (for example, the center line) may be performed. In this case, the game state may be shifted to the "ART state" (RT5 or RT6 state) by displaying a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination (for example, 7 reds) by the navigation.

<Additional lottery for the number of ART games>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state), the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed. Since this process is controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51), various tables, various control flags, various control counters, and various control data required for this process are stored in the main ROM 52, the main RAM 53, and the like. ..

[Contents of additional lottery]
In the present embodiment, when a specific combination is won during the "pseudo-bonus", the number of ART games is added to the lottery. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination related to the "bell" (small winning combination / replay data pointers "31" to "39"("F_bellALL") in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 , "F_Middle Bell 1" to "F_Middle Bell 4" and "F_Right Bell 1" to "F_Right Bell 4")), when the winning combination) is won, an additional lottery is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, an additional lottery table (means for changing the additional lottery setting) for the number of ART games will be described. The additional lottery table shows the correspondence between the value (“0” to “11”) of the “additional occurrence flag / type” corresponding to the number of additional games and the corresponding lottery value.

In the present embodiment, when the additional lottery is won during the "pseudo-bonus", the number of added games (addition generation flag and type value) won in the reel acceleration process performed at the start of the next unit game is added. Based on this, a predetermined reel effect (reel action effect and symbol display effect) is performed. That is, when the value of the addition generation flag and type is "2" or more (when the addition of the number of ART games is confirmed), the value of the addition generation flag and type is set to the value of the addition generation flag and type at the time of acceleration processing of the next unit game. Based on this, a predetermined reel effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the value of the addition generation flag and type is "0" or "1", it means that the addition lottery is not won. In this case, the addition of the number of ART games is performed. Not done. However, when the value of the additional generation flag and type is "0", not only the number of ART games is added but also the reel effect is not performed, but when the value of the additional generation flag and type is "1". Performs a reel effect (unfortunate effect: reel action effect only) different from the case of winning the additional lottery at the start of the next unit game.

Further, in the additional lottery table of the present embodiment, as in the case of the lottery value change table in the RT1 state shown in FIG. 25, settings 1 to 6 are provided as the setting of the additional lottery value of the addition generation flag and type. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, when the addition generation flag and type is "2" or more, the set numerical value (1 to 6) increases and the lottery value also increases linearly. Is set to. Specifically, in this example, an additional lottery table is set so that the lottery value increases by 20 when the set numerical value increases by 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the set numerical value (1 to 6) increases, the winning probability (frequency of reel effect) of the additional lottery in the "pseudo-bonus" increases. In the present embodiment, the setting in the lottery value change table in the RT1 state shown in FIG. 25 and the setting in the additional lottery table are linked. Therefore, by changing the setting, it is possible to change the probability that the specific symbol of the left reel 3L, which constitutes the main display role that triggers the transition to the "pseudo-bonus", is displayed, and the number of ART games is added. The winning probability of the lottery can be changed. In this case, it is possible to predict the current setting by grasping the frequency at which the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L at the start of the "pseudo-bonus" game.

In the present embodiment, in the additional lottery table, an example in which the lottery value of the additional generation flag and type "2" or more is linearly increased with respect to the increase of the set numerical value (1 to 6) has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. If the total value of the lottery value of the additional generation flag and type "2" or more is set to increase with respect to the increase of the set numerical value (1 to 6), the additional generation flag and type "2" or more The lottery value for each value of is arbitrarily set.

In the additional lottery process for the number of ART games using the additional lottery table of FIG. 73, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment) is set as an additional generation flag and type. The lottery value specified for each value of is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the additional generation flag and type (number of additional games) at that time is won. The above-mentioned additional lottery process is performed in the RT game number process described later (see FIG. 109 described later).

<Continuous lottery of ART>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state), a continuous lottery of the "pseudo-bonus" (ART) is performed. Since this process is controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51), various tables, various control flags, various control counters, and various control data required for this process are stored in the main ROM 52, the main RAM 53, and the like. ..

[Contents of ART continuous lottery]
In the present embodiment, the symbol combination of "Replay B", "Replay R", "Replay P" or "Replay 6" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and the RT state shifts to the RT5 state ("pseudo bonus"). At that time, a continuous lottery of ART (“pseudo-bonus”) is performed.

Here, the ART continuous lottery table used in the ART continuous lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The ART continuous lottery table shows the correspondence between the value ("0" to "5") of the "ART continuous occurrence flag and counter" corresponding to the number of continuous sets (the number of continuous stocks) of the "pseudo bonus" and the lottery value. Shown.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the present embodiment, when the ART continuation occurrence flag / counter of "1" or more is acquired by the ART continuation lottery, it means that the ART continuation is won. For example, when the ART continuation generation flag and counter "3" are acquired, three sets of "pseudo-bonus" games (one set is 100 games) are continued.

In the ART lottery process using the ART continuation lottery table of FIG. 74, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 255 in this embodiment) is set as an ART continuation occurrence flag / counter value. The lottery value specified for each is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter (the number of continuous stocks) at that time is won. The ART continuous lottery process described above is performed in the winning search process described later (see FIG. 107 described later).

In the present embodiment, an example in which one type of lottery value is set for the ART continuous lottery table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of types of lottery value settings for the ART continuous lottery table may be provided.

<Basic configuration of reel production>
[Overview of reel production]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a predetermined unit game in the "pseudo-bonus" (RT5 state) or the "pseudo-bonus relief state" (RT6 state), the reels are accelerated during the period of the reel acceleration processing performed at the start of the game. Various reel effects are performed by controlling the operation. Here, the configuration of the reel effect pattern commonly used in various reel effect and various excitation pattern data of the reel used in each reel effect pattern will be described. The operations of various reel effects described below are controlled by the main CPU 51, and various tables, various control flags, various control counters, various control data, etc., which will be described later, necessary for the control are stored in the main ROM 52 and the main RAM 53. The reel.

The reel acceleration process is a period during which the player cannot operate the game (substantially equivalent to a lock). Therefore, in the reel effect performed during the acceleration process, it is not necessary to separately perform the lock process, so that the amount of data required for the reel effect can be reduced and the process can be simplified.

The reel effect performed in the present embodiment is composed of a reel action effect and a symbol display effect. The reel action effect is mainly an effect of vibrating the reel, and the symbol display effect is, for example, a specific symbol combination corresponding to the transition process of the gaming state (for example, "red 7 alignment" and "RB" described later. It is a production that displays "matching" and "clown matching" symbol combinations) on a predetermined line. Then, in the present embodiment, a reel effect (“additional effect”, “clown missing effect”, “pseudo-bonus prize-winning pretending effect”, and “continuous confirmation effect”, which will be described later), and a reel are performed. Two types of reel production forms are prepared: a reel production that only performs an action production (“disappointing production” described later).

[Explanation of stop symbol position table and production pattern type during reel production]
Here, various reel effect patterns prepared in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the reel effect stop symbol position table shown in FIG. 75. The symbol position table for stopping at the time of reel production is the type of reel production pattern (effect pattern type "0" to "7") and each reel at the time of reel production (symbol display production) performed corresponding to each production pattern type. The correspondence with the symbol stop position (position on the effective line) of is shown. The numerical value of the symbol stop position of each reel corresponds to the value of the symbol position defined in the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the contents of the effect pattern defined in the additional effect line lottery table will be described.

The "sorry effect" corresponding to the effect pattern type "0" is, for example, a reel effect performed when the addition generation flag and type "1" are acquired by the addition lottery (when the number of addition games is 0). In the "sorry production", only the reel action production is performed, and the symbol display production is not performed. Therefore, in the reel effect stop symbol position table, the stop symbol position of each reel is not specified in the column of the effect pattern type "0".

The "center line red 7 alignment" production corresponding to the production pattern type "1" is "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" ("red 7 alignment") on the center line after the reel action production. It is a reel effect that performs a symbol display effect to display a symbol combination (a combination of special symbols).

In the "top line red 7 alignment" effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "2", after the reel action effect, the top line (upper area of the left reel 3L, upper area of the middle reel 3C, and upper area of the right reel 3R) is displayed. It is a reel effect that displays a symbol combination (a special combination of symbols) of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" on the connecting line).

In the "bottom line red 7 alignment" effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "3", after the reel action effect, the bottom line (lower area of the left reel 3L, lower area of the middle reel 3C, and lower area of the right reel 3R are displayed. It is a reel effect that displays a symbol combination (a special combination of symbols) of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" on the connecting line).

After the reel action effect, the "Cross-up line red 7 alignment" effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "4" is the cross-up line (lower area of left reel 3L, middle area of middle reel 3C, and upper area of right reel 3R. It is a reel effect that displays a symbol combination (a special combination of symbols) of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" on a line connecting the areas).

After the reel action effect, the "Cross down line red 7 alignment" effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "5" is the cross down line (upper area of the left reel 3L, middle area of the middle reel 3C, and lower area of the right reel 3R. It is a reel effect that displays a symbol combination (a special combination of symbols) of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" on a line connecting the areas).

The "center line clown alignment" production corresponding to the production pattern type "6" is a combination of "clown"-"clown"-"clown" ("clown alignment") on the center line after the reel action production (special). It is a reel effect that performs a symbol display effect to display a combination of symbols).

Then, the "center line RB alignment" production corresponding to the production pattern type "7" is a pattern of "red 7"-"red 7"-"BAR" ("RB alignment") on the center line after the reel action production. It is a reel effect that performs a symbol display effect to display a combination (a combination of special symbols).

[Reel action production]
Next, the operation (rotational operation) of the reel action performed at the time of the reel action effect will be described. In the present embodiment, three types of patterns (reel action pattern 0, reel action pattern 1 and reel action pattern 2) are prepared as reel action patterns.

The reel action pattern 0 is a reel action pattern selected when the reel action effect is not performed. In this case, the reel effect is not performed, and the normal acceleration process is performed.

The reel action pattern 1 is a reel action pattern performed when the "sorry effect" corresponding to the effect pattern type "0" is selected. In the reel action pattern 1, after each reel is vibrated, the reel effect is finished.

The reel action pattern 2 is a reel action pattern performed when any one of the effect pattern types "1" to "7" is selected. In the reel action pattern 2, after performing the reel vibration operation, the reverse rotation operation, and the forward rotation operation in this order, the symbol combination corresponding to the effect pattern type (for example, "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" ) Is displayed on a predetermined line, and the reel effect is finished.

Hereinafter, various tables used for controlling the reel action effect will be described. The various tables described below are referred to in the game start effect control process shown in FIG. 91, which will be described later.

[Reel action pattern table]
The reel action pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the reel action pattern table, reel control flag data for identifying the type of the reel action pattern described above is defined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the reel control flag data “0”, “1”, and “2” are associated with the reel action pattern 0, the reel action pattern 1, and the reel action pattern 2, respectively.

[Reel action data selection table]
Next, the reel action data selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The reel effect data selection table shows the correspondence between the value (number) of the reel action pattern and the reel action data selection index for specifying the reel action operation to be executed. For example, when the value of the reel action pattern is "2", the reel action data corresponding to the reel action data selection index "RESEL_SR" is selected.

Further, for example, when the value of the reel action pattern is "0", the reel action data corresponding to the reel action data selection index "RESEL_AC" is selected. When the value of the reel action pattern is "0", as described above, the reel effect is not performed and the normal acceleration process is performed. Therefore, the reel action data corresponding to the reel effect data selection index "RESEL_AC" is This is the data used in normal acceleration processing.

The reel action data selection table of FIG. 77 also shows the relationship between the value of each reel action pattern and the time required for the corresponding reel action effect processing. The time required for the reel action effect processing is calculated by multiplying the timer value used for the reel action pattern by 1.1172 msec.

[Reel action code determination table]
Next, the reel action code determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The reel action code determination table is a reel action code (sub-execution data) that constitutes each reel action data selection index shown in FIG. 77 and an execution code (execution data) of the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action data selection index. ) Is shown in correspondence with the reel action code index for specifying.

Here, the specified contents of the data in the reel action code determination table will be described in more detail by taking, for example, the case where the reel action data selection index is "RESEL_SR" (when the reel action pattern 2 is selected).

When the reel action data selection index is "RESEL_SR", as shown in FIG. 78, in the reel action code index column, "REDAT_RVB", "REDAT_W15", "REDAT_RUN", "REDAT_RAC" and "end code" are displayed from the top. The reel action code index called "" is defined in this order. This means that when "RESEL_SR" is selected as the reel action data selection index, the reel action code specified in "REDAT_RVB", the reel action code specified in "REDAT_W15", and the reel action code specified in "REDAT_RUP". , The reel action code specified in "REDAT_RAC" and the reel action code specified in "end code" are executed in this order.

[Reel action code table]
Next, the reel action code table will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The reel action code table shows the correspondence between each reel action code index shown in FIG. 78 and information on the content of the corresponding reel action effect.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of motor excitation signal patterns (excitation data) related to the acceleration conditions and rotation directions of the reel during the reel action effect are provided, and the number of executions of each excitation signal pattern and the combination of different types of excitation signal patterns are provided. By changing, various reel action effects are possible. Therefore, in the reel action code table shown in FIG. 79, as the information regarding the content of the reel action effect, the address of the excitation data (“MGDAT_AP”, “MGDAT_RM16”, “MGDAT_VIBR”, etc.), which is the information for designating the excitation data, and , The production number data of each excitation data is specified.

The effect number data defines the number of times the corresponding excitation data is executed and information on whether or not the end code (operation end information) is included after the excitation data is executed a specified number of times. When a plurality of excitation data addresses are specified for one reel action code index, the excitation data (reel action code) of the excitation data address listed at the top in the table shown in FIG. 79 is specified. ) Is executed in order from the effect operation.

For example, in the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action code index "REDAT_RVB", first, the excitation operation (reel action code) of "MGDAT_W1ST" is executed once, and then the excitation operation of "MGDAT_W5FR" is executed eight times. Next, the excitation operation of "MGDAT_VIBR" is executed 20 times. Then, after the excitation operation of "MGDAT_W5FR" is executed eight times, the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action data index "REDAT_RVB" is completed.

[Excitation data table]
Next, the excitation data table will be described with reference to FIG. 80. The excitation data table shows the correspondence between each excitation data address defined in FIG. 79 and various information regarding the contents of the corresponding excitation data (excitation operation).

In this embodiment, as information on the contents of the excitation data, the excitation direction (reel rotation direction) data, the excitation timer value (the number of interrupt processes), and the presence / absence of the end code are specified. When the excitation data address specifies information on the contents of a plurality of excitation data (excitation operation), the excitation data is executed in order from the excitation data listed at the top in the table shown in FIG. 80.

For example, in the excitation operation (normal acceleration processing operation) of the reel of the excitation data address "MGDAT_AP", first, the reel is rotated in the forward direction (arrow A direction in FIG. 6) for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value "6". Perform the operation to make it once. Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is performed once for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "5". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is performed once for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "4". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is repeated three times for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value "3". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is performed once for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "2". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is repeated twice for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "3". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is repeated twice for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "2". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is performed once for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "3". Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is repeated three times for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value "2". Finally, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is performed once for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value "3". The period corresponding to the excitation timer value "1" corresponds to the period of one interrupt processing, which is 1.1172 msec in the present embodiment.

Further, for example, in the excitation operation of the reel of the excitation data address "MGDAT_VIBR", first, the reel is rotated in the forward direction for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value "24". Next, the reel is rotated in the opposite direction (the direction opposite to the arrow A direction in FIG. 6) for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value “24”. Further, for example, in the excitation operation of the reel of the excitation data address “MGDAT_RM16”, the operation of rotating the reel in the reverse direction is repeated eight times during the period corresponding to the excitation timer value “10”.

[Example of basic operation of reel production]
Here, an example of the basic operation flow of the reel effect will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The operation example of the reel effect shown in FIG. 81 is an operation example of the reel effect (“additional effect” described later) performed when the number of ART games is added to the lottery during the “pseudo bonus”, and the effect pattern. This is an operation example of the reel effect when the type is "1"("center line red 7 alignment").

In the reel effect (“additional effect”) shown in FIG. 81, after the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 (“RESEL_SR”) is performed, “Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”-“ A symbol display effect for displaying the symbol combination of "Red 7" is performed. Therefore, in the reel production in this case, when the start lever is operated by the player and the unit game (acceleration process) is started, the reel first stops for a predetermined time (“MGDAT_W1ST” and “MGDAT_W5FR”). Next, the reel vibration operation is performed (MGDAT_VIBR). Then, the reel is stopped for a predetermined time (“MGDAT_W5FR”).

After that, the reel is rotated in the reverse direction (REDAT_RUP). Next, the reel is rotated forward (REDAT_RAC). As a result, the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 (“RESEL_SR”) is completed.

After the reel action effect is completed, constant speed processing (MGDAT_AP) for reel effect is performed. Then, after the constant speed processing for reel effect, the symbol display effect is performed.

In the symbol display effect of "center line red 7 alignment", first, in the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" is stopped (held) on the center line. In this stop operation, the reel action corresponding to "RESEL_DC" in the reel action determination table of FIG. 78 is performed. Specifically, the reverse rotation operation, the relaxation operation, and the forward rotation operation are performed on the left reel 3L in this order (the operation specified by "MGDAT_DP" in the excitation data table of FIG. 80), and the left reel 3L Control so that the symbol "Red 7" appears to stop.

Next, in the middle reel 3C, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped (held) on the center line. Then, on the right reel 3R, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped (held) on the center line. It should be noted that each stop operation of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is also executed by the reel action corresponding to "RESEL_DC" in the same manner as the stop operation of the left reel 3L. Then, the operation of all reels is maintained (the signal is continuously sent to the same exciting phase). As a result, the symbol display effect is completed.

In the "additional effect", as will be described later, a reel effect may be performed a plurality of times according to the number of additional games (addition generation flag and type value) won by the additional lottery. In this case, after the symbol display effect is completed, the operation returns to the reel action effect. In addition, as will be described later, in the "additional effect", the reel effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "0" is finally achieved regardless of the number of additional games (addition generation flag and type value) won by the additional lottery. ("Sorry production") is executed and the reel production ends. Note that FIG. 81 also shows the flow of the random acceleration processing of the reel performed after the “additional effect”, but the random acceleration processing will be described in detail later.

<Various reel production>
In the present embodiment, when any of the following conditions (1) to (4) is satisfied, a predetermined unit game (game) that satisfies the condition is started at the start of the next unit game (during acceleration processing). Perform reel production.
(1) When the number of ART games is added to the lottery during the "pseudo-bonus" (2) The role of the winning number "30" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G9") is won, and the design combination of "Clown matching" If the stop display cannot be displayed on the valid line (when the clown is missed)
(3) After the game state has fallen from "between pseudo BB flags" or "between pseudo RB flags" (special game preparation state) to "normal state", the game state is changed to "pseudo bonus relief state" (ART state) by relief measures. ) (4) If you win the ART continuation lottery that is carried out when the game state shifts to "pseudo-bonus"

In the following, the reel effects performed in the above cases (1) to (4) will be referred to as "additional effect", "clown missing effect", "pseudo bonus winning pretending effect", and "continuous confirmation effect", respectively.

[Additional production]
The "additional effect" is a reel effect performed when the number of ART games is added to the lottery during the "pseudo bonus". The content of the "additional effect" is determined based on the value of the additional generation flag and type (the number of additional games) won by the additional lottery. Specifically, the value of the effect pattern type ("0" to "6") described with reference to FIG. 75 is determined by lottery based on the value of the additional generation flag and type ("1" to "11"). .. Then, in the "additional effect", a reel effect corresponding to the determined value of the effect pattern type is performed.

In addition, when the addition generation flag and the type "0" are acquired by the addition lottery (when the addition lottery is not won), the reel effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 73. Further, in the present embodiment, in the "additional effect", the reel effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "7" ("center line RB alignment") is not performed.

Further, in the "additional effect", the number of reel effects performed in one acceleration processing period is not limited to one, and can be performed a plurality of times. In this case, the number of reel effects is the value of the additional generation flag / type (“1” to “11”) acquired by the additional lottery and the subtraction value of the additional generation flag / type (“1” to “11”) corresponding to the effect pattern type. It is determined based on "0" to "5").

Hereinafter, various tables used for controlling the content of the "additional effect" and an operation example of the "additional effect" will be described. Since the operation of the "additional effect" is controlled by the main control circuit 41, the various tables described below are stored in the main ROM 52.

(1) Additional effect line lottery table First, the additional effect line lottery table (effect pattern determining means) will be described with reference to FIG. 82. The additional effect line lottery table defines the lottery value of each effect pattern type (contents of reel effect) set for each additional generation flag and type value ("1" to "11") acquired by the additional lottery. To do.

In the "additional effect", the type of the symbol combination and the type of the display line to be displayed at the time of the symbol display effect are determined based on the value of the effect pattern type. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, as the type of the display symbol in the "additional effect", the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" ("red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7"). Alternatively, prepare a pattern combination ("clown"-"clown"-"clown") of "clown matching". In addition, as display lines, center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line and cross-down line are prepared for the symbol combination of "red 7 matching", and for the symbol combination of "clown matching". Prepare only the center line.

In the lottery process for each effect pattern type using the addition effect line lottery table of FIG. 82, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 255 in this embodiment) is used as an addition generation flag. The lottery value of the effect pattern type set for each type value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the value of the effect pattern type at that time is won. It should be noted that this lottery process is performed in a stop position determination process for additional effect (see FIG. 93 described later), which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, the lottery value is defined only for the effect pattern type “0” in the column of the addition generation flag and type “1”, and the value is “256”. Therefore, when the value of the addition generation flag and type is "1", the effect pattern type "0" is always won, and the "sorry effect" (reel action effect only) is performed.

In the additional effect line lottery table shown in FIG. 82, the lottery value of the effect pattern type "1" is defined when the value of the additional generation flag and type is "3" or more, and the value of the additional effect flag and type is defined. Only in the case of "3" or more, the reel effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "1" is won. In addition, the lottery values of the effect pattern types "2" to "5" are defined when the value of the additional generation flag and type is "2" or more, and the value of the additional generation flag and type is "2" or more. Only in cases, the reel effects corresponding to these effect pattern types are won.

Further, in the additional effect line lottery table shown in FIG. 82, the lottery value of the effect pattern type "6" is defined when the value of the additional effect flag and type is "7" or more, and the additional effect flag and type are defined. Only when the value is "7" or more, the reel effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "6" is won. In this embodiment, when the value of the addition generation flag and type is "2" or more, the addition effect line lottery table is set so as not to win the reel effect ("sorry effect") corresponding to the effect pattern type "0". It is set.

(2) Addition occurrence flag and type data subtraction value table Next, the addition occurrence flag and type data subtraction value table will be described with reference to FIG. 83. The addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table is used when determining control data (addition generation flag and type subtraction value) for controlling the number of reel effects performed in the "addition effect".

The addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table is composed of each effect pattern type (content of reel effect) and the corresponding subtraction value (any of "0", "1", "2" and "5"). Specify the correspondence. The value of the "corresponding subtraction game number" described in the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table is a value obtained by converting the subtraction value into the number of games. Specifically, the value of "the number of corresponding subtraction games" is the addition generation flag and type corresponding to the addition generation flag and type after subtraction (after update) from the number of addition generation games before subtraction (before update). Corresponds to the value after subtracting the number of games.

In the "additional effect", as shown in the reel effect operation example described later, the reel effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "0" is finally achieved regardless of the value of the addition generation flag and type ("sorry effect"). ") Is executed and the reel production ends. Therefore, the subtraction value of the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table and the lottery value of the addition effect line lottery table are appropriately set so as to enable such reel effect.

(3) Outline of operation of additional effect Next, an outline of operation of "additional effect" will be described. In the "additional effect", first, a reel effect (first reel effect) corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type determined based on the value of the additional generation flag and type (initial value) acquired by the additional lottery is performed. .. Next, the value of the additional generation flag / type is updated by subtracting the subtraction value corresponding to the content (effect pattern type) of the first reel effect from the initial value of the additional generation flag / type.

Next, the effect pattern type is determined again by lottery based on the value of the additional generation flag and type after the update. Next, a reel effect (second reel effect) corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type determined again is performed. After that, the value of the addition generation flag / type is updated to "1", and the addition generation flag / type update process (subtraction process) and the addition generation flag / type update process (subtraction process) until the reel effect ("sorry effect") of the effect pattern type "0" is performed. , The reel production process based on the value of the additional generation flag and type after the update is repeated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the value (initial value) of the additional generation flag and type acquired by the additional lottery is "1", only the "sorry effect" (reel action effect only) in the "addition effect". ) Is performed. However, if the value (initial value) of the additional generation flag and type acquired by the additional lottery is "2" or more, the reel effect other than the "sorry effect" (the reel effect that performs the symbol display effect after the reel action effect). Is performed, and the reel production is executed multiple times. The number of symbol display effects is -1 for reel effects. Specific examples of various operations of the "additional effect" will be described below.

(4) Operation example of additional production 1
First, as an operation example 1 of the "addition effect", an operation example when the addition generation flag and type "3" (the number of addition games is 100 games) is acquired by the addition lottery will be described.

In the operation example 1, first, the reel action pattern 2 is selected as the reel action pattern. Next, when, for example, the effect pattern type "1" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the acquired additional generation flag and type "3", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After the (reel vibration operation, reverse rotation operation, and forward rotation operation) are performed, the symbol display effect of "center line red 7 alignment" is performed. This completes the first reel production.

Next, the value of the addition generation flag and type is updated. Specifically, in the first reel effect, "2" is acquired as the subtraction value, so the subtraction value "2" is subtracted from the initial value "3" of the addition generation flag and type, and after subtraction (after update). ) Is added, and the value of the flag and type is "1". In this case, the reel action pattern 1 (only the reel vibration operation) is selected as the reel action pattern.

Next, a reel effect (“sorry effect”) corresponding to the additional generation flag and type “1” after the update is performed. As a result, the second reel production is completed, and the additional production is also completed.

In the operation example 1, as described above, the reel effect is performed twice in total including the "sorry effect", and the number of symbol display effects is one.

(5) Operation example of additional production 2
Next, as an operation example 2 of the "addition effect", an operation example will be described when the addition generation flag and type "3" (the number of addition games is 100 games) is acquired by the addition lottery as in the operation example 1. ..

In the operation example 2, first, the reel action pattern 2 is selected as the reel action pattern. Next, when, for example, the effect pattern type "2" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the acquired additional generation flag and type "3", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After that, the design display effect of "Top line red 7 alignment" is performed. This completes the first reel production.

Next, the value of the addition generation flag and type is updated. Specifically, in the first reel effect, "1" is acquired as the subtraction value, so the subtraction value "1" is subtracted from the initial value "3" of the addition generation flag and type, and after subtraction (after update). ) Is added, and the value of the flag and type is "2". In this case, the reel action pattern 2 is selected as the reel action pattern.

Next, when, for example, the effect pattern type "3" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the updated addition generation flag and type "2", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After the (reel vibration operation, reverse rotation operation, and forward rotation operation) are performed, the symbol display effect of "bottom line red 7 alignment" is performed. This completes the second reel production.

Then, the value of the addition generation flag and type is updated again. Specifically, in the second reel effect, "1" is acquired as the subtraction value, so the subtraction value "1" is subtracted from the first update value "2" of the addition generation flag and type, and after the update. The value of the addition generation flag and type is "1". In this case, the reel action pattern 1 is selected as the reel action pattern.

Next, a reel effect (“sorry effect”) corresponding to the additional generation flag and type “1” after the update is performed. As a result, the third reel production is completed, and the additional production is also completed.

In the operation example 2, as described above, the reel effect is performed a total of three times including the "sorry effect", and the number of symbol display effects is two.

(6) Operation example of additional production 3
Next, as an operation example 3 of the "addition effect", an operation example when the addition generation flag and type "7" (the number of addition games is 300 games) is acquired by the addition lottery will be described.

In the operation example 3, first, the reel action pattern 2 is selected as the reel action pattern. Next, when, for example, the effect pattern type "6" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the acquired additional generation flag and type "7", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After that, the design display of "Center line clowns" will be performed. This completes the first reel production.

Next, the value of the addition generation flag and type is updated. Specifically, in the first reel effect, "5" is acquired as the subtraction value, so the subtraction value "5" is subtracted from the initial value "7" of the addition generation flag and type, and after subtraction (after update). ) Is added, and the value of the flag and type is "2". In this case, the reel action pattern 2 is selected as the reel action pattern.

Next, when, for example, the effect pattern type "4" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the updated additional generation flag and type "2", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After that, the design display effect of "Cross-up line red 7 alignment" is performed. This completes the second reel production.

Then, the value of the addition generation flag and type is updated again. Specifically, in the second reel effect, "1" is acquired as the subtraction value, so the subtraction value "1" is subtracted from the first update value "2" of the addition generation flag and type, and after the update. The value of the addition generation flag and type is "1". In this case, the reel action pattern 1 is selected as the reel action pattern.

Next, a reel effect (“sorry effect”) corresponding to the additional generation flag and type “1” after the update is performed. As a result, the third reel production is completed, and the additional production is also completed.

In the operation example 3, as described above, the reel effect is performed a total of three times including the "sorry effect", and the number of symbol display effects is two.

[Clown missing production]
In the "Clown Missing Production", the role of the winning number "30" (abbreviation "F_Rip G9") (including "Replay P" and "Replay 6") is won, and the design combination of "Clown Matching" (special) This is a reel effect that is performed when (a combination of various symbols) cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (missed).

In the "clown missing effect", when the reel acceleration process of the next unit game after the unit game in which the above conditions are satisfied (at the start of the "pseudo-bonus" game), the effect pattern type "6" ("center line clown alignment") Perform a reel production corresponding to. More specifically, in the "clown omission effect", after the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is performed as in the "additional effect", the symbol combination of "clown matching" is displayed on the center line. Performs a symbol display effect.

In addition, in the state where the role of the winning number "30" (abbreviation "F_Rip G9") is won (the state where the transition to the "pseudo bonus" is confirmed), it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "clown matching" is missed. Is determined by referring to the value of the missing flag stored in a predetermined storage area (storage area for penalty) such as the main RAM 53. The missing flag is a flag indicating whether or not the "clown missing effect" is performed at the start of the next unit game.

Here, FIG. 84 shows a table summarizing the contents of the missing flag. As shown in FIG. 84, when the winning combination of the winning number "30" (abbreviated as "F_lip G9") is won and the symbol combination of "clown matching" is missed (the "clown missing effect" is produced at the start of the next unit game. ”Was performed), the value of the missing flag is set to“ 1 ”, and in other cases,“ 0 ”is set.

In addition, when performing the "clown dropout effect", from the winning of the winning number "30" (abbreviated as "F_lip G9") to the normal reel rotation operation (a state in which the player can stop the operation). The reel control procedure is as follows.

First, if the role of the winning number "30" (abbreviated as "F_Rip G9") is internally won and the symbol combination of "Clown Matching" is missed (in this case, "Replay 6" actually wins). The value of the missing flag is set to "1". Next, when the next unit game is started, the reel acceleration process (inoperable state) is started, and the above-mentioned "clown omission effect" is performed during the acceleration process. Next, after the "clown dropout effect" is completed, the lock operation is performed for the same period as the period when the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the player's reel stop operation. Next, after the random processing described later is performed, the reel rotation operation shifts to the normal reel rotation operation.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (“Replay P” or “Replay 6”) related to the winning number “30” (abbreviation “F_Rip G9”) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. If so (if a prize is won), the "pseudo-bonus" (ART) game is started. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 7 to 20, the replay combination (“C_PB lip 01” to “C_PB lip 09” and “C_RT5” related to “replay P” and “replay 6”). Multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to "Rip 01" to "C_RT5 Lip 18") are set, and symbol combinations other than the "Clown matching" symbol combination (for example, "Clown"-"Clown"-"BAR", etc. ) Is also set.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the symbol combination of "clown matching" is not displayed, the privilege of "pseudo-bonus" (ART) is set to be given. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even a player who is unfamiliar with the eye-catching is easily given a "pseudo-bonus" (ART).

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the symbol combination of "clown matching" is missed while winning the role of the winning number "30" (abbreviated as "F_lip G9"), the acceleration of the next unit game is accelerated. In the process, a "clown omission effect" that displays the pattern combination of "clown matching" is performed. As a result, in the present embodiment, even if the symbol combination of "clown matching" is missed, it is possible to notify the player that the "pseudo bonus" (ART) has been granted.

[Pseudo bonus prize pretending production]
The "pseudo-bonus prize-winning pretending effect" is a relief measure (RT1 state) after the game state has fallen from "pseudo BB flag interval" (RT3 state) or "pseudo RB flag interval" (RT4 state) to "normal state" (RT1 state). When "Replay 4" wins in "Normal state" by (Navigation) and the game state shifts from "Normal state" (RT1 state) to "Pseudo bonus relief state" (RT6 state) (thick arrow in FIG. 67) It is a reel production performed in (see).

After the game state has fallen from "between pseudo BB flags" to "normal state", if the game state shifts from "normal state" to "pseudo bonus relief state" due to relief measures, the "pseudo bonus relief state" will be displayed. In the acceleration process performed at the start of the game (at the start of the next unit game after the unit game in which the transition to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" is confirmed), the effect pattern type "1" ("center line red 7 alignment") "Pseudo-bonus prize-winning fake production" corresponding to.

That is, in this case, as a "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect", a reel effect is performed in which the symbol combination of "red 7 matching" is displayed on the center line. In this case, in the "pseudo-bonus prize-winning pretending effect", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is performed as in the "additional effect", and then the symbol display effect of "center line red 7 alignment" is performed. ..

On the other hand, if the gaming state changes from the "pseudo RB flag" to the "normal state" and then the gaming state shifts from the "normal state" to the "pseudo bonus relief state" due to relief measures, the "pseudo bonus relief state" In the acceleration process performed at the start of the game, a "pseudo-bonus prize-winning pretending effect" corresponding to the effect pattern type "7" ("center line RB alignment") is performed.

That is, in this case, as a "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect", a reel effect is performed in which the symbol combination of "RB alignment" is displayed on the center line. At this time, in the "pseudo-bonus prize-winning masquerading effect", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is performed as in the "additional effect", and then the symbol display effect of "center line RB alignment" is performed.

As described above, in the "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect", the symbol combination to be displayed in the reel effect is changed according to the transition route (falling route) of the game state. In the "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect", the type of the transition route of the game state described above is the value ("0" to "2") of the inter-flag transition discriminator stored in a predetermined storage area such as the main RAM 53. ) Is referred to.

With reference to FIG. 85, the correspondence between the type of the transition route in the game state and the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags, and the processing content of the “pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect” in each transition route will be specifically described. .. Note that FIG. 85 is a correspondence table between the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags and the processing content corresponding to each value.

As shown in FIG. 85, the discriminator “1” at the time of transition between flags is RT by a relief measure after the RT state has changed from the RT3 state (“pseudo-BB flag”) to the RT1 state (“normal state”). Corresponds to the "pseudo-bonus prize pretending effect" performed when the state changes from the RT1 state to the RT6 state ("pseudo-bonus relief state"). Further, after the discriminator "2" at the time of transition between flags falls from the RT4 state ("pseudo-RB flag") to the RT1 state ("normal state"), the RT state is changed from the RT1 state to the RT6 state ("normal state") by a relief measure. Corresponds to the "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect" that is performed when the transition to the "pseudo-bonus relief state"). The discriminator "0" at the time of transition between flags corresponds to the case where the game state does not fall and the normal game state is maintained.

Therefore, when the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "1", first, at the start of the unit game after shifting to the RT6 state (the next unit game of the unit game in which the transition to the RT6 state is confirmed). (At the start of), the effect pattern type "1" is set, and the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is cleared (set to "0"). Next, when the reel acceleration process is started, a "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect" corresponding to the effect pattern type "1" is performed. Specifically, after the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is performed, the symbol display effect of "center line red 7 alignment" is performed. After that, "100" is set in the ART game number counter. The ART game number counter is a counter for managing the number of remaining unit games (the number of ART games) in the game period of the "ART state", and is stored in the main RAM 53.

On the other hand, when the value of the inter-flag transition discriminator is "2", first, the effect pattern type "7" is set at the start of the unit game when the RT6 state is entered, and the inter-flag transition discriminator is set. The value of is cleared (set to "0"). Next, when the reel acceleration process is started, a "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect" corresponding to the effect pattern type "7" is performed. Specifically, after the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is performed, the symbol display effect of "center line RB alignment" is performed. After that, "50" is set in the ART game number counter.

In addition, in the case of performing "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect", the reel control procedure from the transition to the RT6 state to the normal reel rotation operation (a state in which the player can stop the operation) is as follows. Is.

First, in the RT1 state, when "Replay 4" wins a prize, the RT state shifts to the RT6 state, and the game in the RT6 state is started (when the start lever is pressed), the reel acceleration process (inoperability). (State) is started, and during the acceleration process, the above-mentioned "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect" is performed. Next, after the end of the "pseudo-bonus prize pretending effect", the same period as the period performed when the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" or "RB alignment" is stopped and displayed on the valid line by the player's reel stop operation. , The lock operation is performed. Next, after the random processing described later is performed, the reel rotation operation shifts to the normal reel rotation operation.

[Continued confirmation production]
The "continuation confirmation effect" is when the set of the next "pseudo bonus" to be continued is started when the ART continuous lottery to be carried out when the game state shifts to the "pseudo bonus" (ART: RT5 state) is won. This is a reel effect performed in the reel acceleration process of (the unit game next to the unit game won in the ART continuous lottery).

In the "continuous confirmation effect", a reel effect corresponding to the effect pattern type "1" is performed. That is, the reel production of "center line red 7 alignment" is performed. More specifically, in the "continuous confirmation effect", after the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is performed as in the addition effect, the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" is displayed on the center line. Display production is performed.

In the case of performing the "continuation confirmation effect", the normal reel rotation operation is performed in the start game of the next "pseudo bonus" (ART) set from the final game of the "pseudo bonus" set in which the ART continuation is confirmed. The reel control procedure until (a state in which the player can stop the operation) is performed is as follows.

First, in the final game of the "pseudo-bonus" set in which the ART continuation is confirmed (the game in which the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0"), after the reel is stopped for the third time, the ART end lock operation is performed. Will be done. After that, the start lever is pressed by the player, and the next set of "pseudo-bonus" is started. Then, the reel acceleration process (inoperable state) is started in the first unit game of this "pseudo-bonus", and the above-mentioned "continuation confirmation effect" is performed during the acceleration process. Next, after the end of the "continuation confirmation effect", the lock operation is performed for the same period as the period when the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the player's reel stop operation. Next, after the random processing described later is performed, the reel rotation operation shifts to the normal reel rotation operation.

<Signal output specifications to external centralized terminal board>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the player's reel stop operation, that is, the replay combination corresponding to the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination". If a prize is won, an external signal is output from the main control circuit 41 to the external centralized terminal. The "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" referred to here is the symbol combination of "C_BB Lip 01" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20 ("Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". ":" Red 7 Alignment ")," C_RB Lip 01 "symbol combination ("Red 7 "-" Red 7 "-" BAR ":" RB Alignment "), and" C_PB Lip 01 "symbol combination ("" It is a combination of any of "Clown"-"Clown"-"Clown": "Clown matching").

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" is displayed by the various reel effects performed during the reel acceleration processing described above, an external signal is similarly transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the external centralized terminal. Is output.

Here, the output specifications of the external signal to the external centralized terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 86 is a table summarizing the contents of the output specifications to the external centralized terminal board.

The "replay B prize" in FIG. 86 is a case where the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the reel stop operation of the player, and the "replay P prize" is the game. This is the case when the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the reel stop operation of the person. In each of these cases, the main control circuit 41 outputs an external signal to a predetermined terminal (hereinafter referred to as an external signal terminal 1) of the external centralized terminal plate, and turns the external signal terminal 1 into an ON state.

Further, the "replay R winning" in FIG. 86 is a case where the symbol combination of "RB alignment" is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the reel stop operation of the player. In this case, the main control circuit 41 outputs an external signal to a terminal different from the external signal terminal 1 of the external centralized terminal plate (hereinafter referred to as an external signal terminal 2), and turns the external signal terminal 2 into an ON state. To do.

Further, the "replay B display during the additional production" in FIG. 86 is a case where the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" is displayed on the center line by the above-mentioned "additional production", and the "additional production is in progress". "Replay P display" is a case where the symbol combination of "clown matching" is displayed on the center line by "additional production". In each of these cases, the main control circuit 41 once turns off the external signal terminal 1 of the external centralized terminal plate, and then outputs the external signal to the external signal terminal 1 again for external signals. Turn terminal 1 on. In this way, by turning the external signal terminal 1 off and then turning it on again, the number of reel effects during the "additional effect" can be accurately counted.

Further, the "replay B display during continuous production" in FIG. 86 is a case where the symbol combination of "red 7 alignment" is displayed on the center line by the above-mentioned "continuous confirmation effect". In this case, the main control circuit 41 temporarily turns off the external signal terminal 1 of the external centralized terminal plate, then outputs the external signal to the external signal terminal 1 again to turn on the external signal terminal 1. Put it in a state. As a result, the number of sets (number of continuations) of the "pseudo-bonus" (ART) can be accurately counted.

Further, the “replay P display during the clown missing effect” in FIG. 86 is a case where the symbol combination of “clown matching” is displayed on the center line by the above-mentioned “clown missing effect”. In this case, the main control circuit 41 outputs an external signal to the external signal terminal 1 of the external centralized terminal plate, and turns on the external signal terminal 1. As a result, the number of transitions to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART) can be accurately counted.

Further, in the "pseudo-bonus pretending replay B display" in FIG. 86, after the game state has fallen from "pseudo BB flag interval" (RT3 state) to "normal state" (RT1 state), the game is played by a relief measure. When the symbol combination of "Red 7 match" is displayed on the center line by the "pseudo bonus winning pretending effect" performed when the state changes from the "normal state" to the "pseudo bonus relief state" (RT6 state). That is. In this case, the main control circuit 41 outputs an external signal to the external signal terminal 1 of the external centralized terminal plate, and turns on the external signal terminal 1. As a result, the number of transitions to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" can be accurately counted.

Further, in the "pseudo-bonus pretending replay R display" in FIG. 86, after the game state has fallen from "pseudo-RB flag interval" (RT4 state) to "normal state" (RT1 state), the game is played by a relief measure. When the symbol combination of "RB alignment" is displayed on the center line by the "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect" performed when the state changes from the "normal state" to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" (RT6 state). That is. In this case, the main control circuit 41 outputs an external signal to the external signal terminal 2 of the external centralized terminal plate, and turns on the external signal terminal 2. As a result, the number of transitions to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" can be accurately counted.

<Random acceleration processing>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, various reel effects for notification are performed during the reel acceleration processing period, and specific symbol combinations are aligned and displayed on a specific line. Therefore, if the game is started as it is after the reel production, the game is started in a state where a specific symbol combination is prepared.

In this case, as described in the above-mentioned prior art, a player who is playing a game in a state where a specific symbol combination is prepared and a player who is playing a game in a state where a specific symbol combination is not prepared. There is a risk that the difference in winning frequency (display probability) of the winning combination will be large, causing a loss to the amusement store. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the various reel effects for notification are completed during the reel acceleration processing described above, random acceleration processing is performed on each reel to solve the above problem.

In the random acceleration process of the present embodiment, first, a random value (any of 0 to 20 in the present embodiment) for determining the wait time to be set for a predetermined reel is acquired. Next, the rotation speed of the predetermined reel is accelerated to a constant speed in the same manner as in the normal acceleration process.

Next, the wait time is set based on the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, the wait time is a random number value × 32 × 1.1172 msec. Then, the set wait time is digested. After that, the target reel of the acceleration process is changed, and the above-mentioned acquisition of the random number value, reel acceleration, setting of the wait time, and digestion are repeated in this order.

In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned various processes are completed for all reels, the random acceleration process is terminated, and then the normal reel rotation control is performed.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 112, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 87.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each game.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 (S4). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S6). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command transmission process (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect control process at the start of the game (S8). In this process, the various reel effects described above are controlled. The details of the effect control process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the reel acceleration process after the reel effect is mainly performed. In the reel acceleration process, the start of rotation of all reels is required, and the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R are driven by the interrupt process (see FIG. 112), which is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. Then, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, in the present embodiment, in the reel rotation start process of S9, a random acceleration process after the reel effect is also performed. The details of the reel rotation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S11). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 64) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 60). Further, in this process, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line after all the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped is collated with the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 20). Then, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S12. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 20), the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is (3). The maximum payout limit is nine.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT state and its transition operation. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT game number processing (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly controls the additional lottery process for the number of ART games performed during the "pseudo-bonus". The details of the RT game number processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect control process at the end of the game (S16). The details of the effect control process at the end of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout end command transmission process (S17). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 42. Then, when the payout end command transmission process is completed, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S21). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the replay is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S21, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S21 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the automatic closing process (S22). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S29 described later.

On the other hand, in S21, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S21 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits the medal acceptance (S23). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 11 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S24). In the present embodiment, for example, the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "3".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S25). When it is determined in S25 that the main CPU 51 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S25 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S29 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S25 that the main CPU 51 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S25 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S26). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42 (S27). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S28). In S28, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S28 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S25 and repeats the processes after S25. On the other hand, in S28, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S28 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S29 described later. In this actual embodiment, for example, the number of games that can be started is "3".

After the processing of S22, if S25 is a NO determination or S28 is a YES determination, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is ON (S29). When the main CPU 51 determines in S29 that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S29 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S25 and repeats the processes after S25.

On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S29 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S30). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery process using the internal lottery table described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery value data in the internal lottery table according to the RT state (game state) (S41). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current RT state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 61), and is defined in the column corresponding to the current RT state in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 22 to 24. Set the winning number, the lottery value, and the data showing the correspondence.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S42). Then, the main CPU 51 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 51 obtains the lottery value corresponding to the winning number by referring to the winning number set in S41 and the data indicating the correspondence relationship with the lottery value, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S43).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S43 is less than 0 (negative value) (S44).

In S44, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S44 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S45). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by 1.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S46). When it is determined in S46 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S46 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S43 and repeats the processes after S43.

On the other hand, in S46, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S46 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the data pointer (S47). That is, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the small winning combination / replay data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S44 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S44 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when the determination in S44 is YES), the main CPU 51 is the current Acquire the small winning combination / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number (S48).

Then, after the processing of S47 or S48, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 26 to 36) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S49).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S50). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 acquires the rotation stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S5 in FIG. 87 with reference to the rotation stop number selection table (see FIG. 37). (S61).

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 38 to 40), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired spinning stop number (S62). .. Specifically, the main CPU 51 has the determination data for each pressing order (pull-in priority table number and pull-in priority selection table number) and the table number selection value at the time of irregular pressing (irregular pressing) corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. (Time table selection data and change status), forward press table change data, forward push table selection data, and forward push table change initial data selection value (table number and change status) are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 64) (S63).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S64). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 87). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Production control process at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the game start effect control process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described. In the game start effect control process, the reel effect process is mainly performed, and this process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (display column effect means) for executing the reel effect process. Further, in the effect control process at the start of the game, a process of outputting an external signal to a predetermined external signal terminal of the external centralized terminal plate is also performed according to the type of reel effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (external signal output means) for outputting an external signal to the external centralized terminal plate.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current RT state is the RT5 state or the RT6 state (S71). In this process, the main CPU 51 grasps the current RT state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 61).

In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current RT state is not the RT5 state or the RT6 state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game start effect control process and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts effect control process). Move to S9 (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current RT state is the RT5 state or the RT6 state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the value of the reel effect counter of the main CPU 51 is "1" or more. Whether or not it is determined (S72). The reel effect counter is a counter for managing the number of reel effects, and is provided in the main RAM 53. When the value of the reel effect counter is "1" or more, the reel effect is performed at the start of the next game (during the reel acceleration process). Further, when the reel effect is the "addition effect", as described above, the number of reel effects is determined according to the value of the addition generation flag and type.

In S72, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the reel effect counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts effect control process). Move to S9 (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S72, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the reel effect counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the stop position determination process (S73). In this process, the values of the reel action pattern and the display symbol pattern (stop symbol position) in the various reel effects described above are determined. That is, in the stop position determination process, the effect pattern type of the reel effect is determined. The details of the stop position determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 starts the reel acceleration operation based on the set reel action pattern value (S74).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the addition generation flag and type is "1" (S75). In S75, when the main CPU 51 determines that the addition generation flag and type is "1" (when the determination in S75 is YES), that is, when the set reel action pattern is the reel action pattern 1, the main CPU 51 Ends the effect control process at the start of the game, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 87). The determination process of S75 is performed before the process of the "end code" that defines the end of operation of the set reel action pattern is performed.

On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 51 determines that the addition generation flag and type is not "1" (when the determination in S75 is NO), that is, when the set reel action pattern is the reel action pattern 2, the main After the reel action effect (vibration operation, reverse rotation operation, forward rotation operation) started in S74 is completed, the CPU 51 performs a constant speed process for reel effect (S76). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the rotation of the reels according to the reel excitation pattern defined in the excitation data address “MGDAT_AP” in the excitation data table of FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 51 detects the reel index on the predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 3L), and then sets the stop symbol position of the predetermined reel based on the set effect pattern type value (S77). Next, the main CPU 51 holds a predetermined reel at the stop symbol position (S78). In this reel holding process, the reel is made to appear to the player as if the reel is stopped by continuously inputting an excitation signal to the stepping motor that rotationally drives the predetermined reel and holding the reel at the stop symbol position.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets a wait time of 240 msec (a time during which the game cannot be operated) with respect to the held predetermined reel (S79). After that, the main CPU 51 monitors the wait time from 240 msec to 0 msec (until the wait time is digested).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S80). In S80, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S80 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process in S80.

On the other hand, in S80, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S80 is YES), has the main CPU 51 stopped (held) all the reels at the corresponding stop diagram positions? Whether or not it is determined (S81).

In S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels are not stopped (held) (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 51 changes the reel to be stopped and returns the process to S77. The processing after S77 is repeated. On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels are stopped (held) (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main CPU 51 clears the set effect pattern type value (when the determination is YES in S81). S82).

In S81, when all the reels are stopped (held) (when a specific symbol combination is displayed on a specific line by the reel effect), the main CPU 51 outputs an external signal shown in FIG. 86. According to the specifications, an external signal is output to a predetermined external signal terminal on the external centralized terminal plate according to the type of reel effect.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the reel effect counter is "0" (S83). In S83, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the reel effect counter is not "0" (when the determination in S83 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S73, and the process after S73 described above (reel effect process). )repeat.

On the other hand, in S83, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the reel effect counter is "0" (when the determination in S83 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the start of the game and mainly performs the process. Move to S9 of the flow (see FIG. 87).

[Stop position determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the stop position determination process performed in S73 in the flowchart (see FIG. 91) of the game start effect control process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the addition generation flag and type is "1" or more (S91).

In S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is "1" or more (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the addition effect stop position determination process (S92). .. In this process, the value of the effect pattern type (contents of the reel effect) of the reel effect performed when the additional lottery in the "pseudo bonus" is won is determined. The details of the stop position determination process for the additional effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Then, after the process of determining the stop position for the addition effect, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S104 described later.

On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is not "1" or more (when the determination in S91 is NO), the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "0" in the main CPU 51. It is determined whether or not it is (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the inter-flag transition discriminator is not "0" (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 has the inter-flag transition discriminator value of "1" and It is determined which of "2" it is. Then, when the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "1", the main CPU 51 has an effect pattern type "1" (reel effect of "center line red 7 alignment": "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect"). Is set, and when the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "2", the effect pattern type "7" (reel effect of "center line RB alignment": "pseudo bonus winning pretending effect") is set. (S94).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags to "0" (S95). Then, after the processing of S95, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S102 described later.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "0" (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 has the value of the ART continuation generation flag and counter set to "0". It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S96).

In S96, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter is not "0" (when the determination in S96 is NO), the main CPU 51 has the effect pattern type "1" ("center line red 7 aligned"). Reel production: "Continued confirmation production") is set (S97). It should be noted that this reel effect is performed in the reel acceleration process of the next game (starting game of the continuous set of ART) after the end of ART. Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter (S98). Then, after the processing of S98, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S102 described later.

On the other hand, in S96, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter is "0" (when the determination in S96 is YES), the value of the missing counter is "1" in the main CPU 51. Whether or not it is determined (S99).

In S99, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the missing counter is "1" (when the determination in S99 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect of the effect pattern type "6" ("center line clown alignment"). : "Clown missing effect") is set (S100). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the dropout counter to "0" (S101). Then, after the processing of S101, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S102 described later.

After processing S95, S98 or S101, or when S99 is a NO determination, the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 2. Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reel effect counter (S103).

Then, after the processing of S92 or S103, the main CPU 51 turns on the random acceleration processing flag (S104). The random acceleration processing flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform random processing, and when the random acceleration processing flag is in the ON state, random acceleration processing is performed after the reel effect. The random acceleration processing flag is stored in the main RAM 53. After the process of S104, the main CPU 51 ends the stop position determination process, and shifts the process to S74 in the flowchart (see FIG. 91) of the game start effect control process.

[Stop position determination process for additional production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the stop position determination process for additional effect performed in S92 in the flowchart of the stop position determination process (see FIG. 92) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 draws a lottery to determine the effect pattern type to be set at the time of "addition effect" based on the value of the addition generation flag and type data (S111). In this process, the main CPU 51 draws the effect pattern type by referring to the additional effect line lottery table shown in FIG. 82.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the information of the stop symbol position of each reel to be stopped (held) in the "additional effect" based on the value of the effect pattern type determined in S111 (S112). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the stop symbol position of each reel corresponding to the reel effect content with reference to the reel effect stop symbol position table shown in FIG. 75. If the value of the effect pattern type is "0", that is, if the value of the addition generation flag and type data is "1" and the "sorry effect" (reel action effect only) is executed, the process is stopped. The symbol position is not set.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the addition generation flag / type data subtraction value table (see FIG. 83), and subtracts the subtraction value corresponding to the set effect pattern type from the current addition generation flag / type value. (S113). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the additional generation flag / type subtracted in S113 as the value of the reel effect counter and the value of the new additional generation flag / type (S114).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the additional generation flag / type after the update is "1" (S115).

In S115, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the added generation flag and type after the update is "1" (when the determination in S115 is YES), that is, "sorry effect" (reel action effect only) is executed. If so, the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 1 (S116). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reel effect counter (S117). When the value of the addition generation flag and type is "1", the value of the reel effect counter is also "1". Therefore, since the value of the reel effect counter becomes "0" by the processing of S117, the "additional effect" also ends after the end of the "sorry effect". Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 51 ends the addition effect stop position determination process, and shifts the process to S104 in the flowchart (see FIG. 92) of the stop position determination process.

On the other hand, in S115, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is not "1" (when the determination in S115 is NO), that is, when the symbol display effect is performed after the reel action effect, The main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 2 (S118). Then, after the processing of S118, the main CPU 51 ends the addition effect stop position determination process, and shifts the process to S104 in the flowchart (see FIG. 92) of the stop position determination process.

[Reel rotation start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the reel rotation start processing performed in S9 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the random acceleration processing flag is on (S121).

In S121, when the main CPU 51 determines that the random acceleration processing flag is on (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs random acceleration processing (S122). In this process, each reel is randomly accelerated after the end of various reel effects, and the rotation speed of each reel reaches a predetermined constant speed. The details of the random acceleration processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later.

After the processing of S122, the main CPU 51 turns off the random acceleration processing flag (S123). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the additional generation flag and type to "0" (S124). By this process, the addition generation flag and type are reset. Then, after the processing of S124, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start processing, and shifts the processing to S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 87).

Here, returning to the process of S121 again, the process when S121 is determined to be NO will be described. In S121, when the main CPU 51 determines that the random acceleration processing flag is not on (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 0 (S125).

Next, the main CPU 51 simultaneously performs acceleration processing on all reels based on the set reel action pattern 0 (S126). In this process, a normal acceleration process is executed when the reel effect and the random acceleration process are not performed. Then, after the processing of S126, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start processing and shifts the processing to S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[Random acceleration processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the random acceleration process performed in S122 in the flowchart of the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 94) will be described. The random acceleration process of each reel is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (random acceleration means) for executing the random acceleration process.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 0 (initial value of the reel action pattern) (S131). By this process, a normal acceleration process is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires random values for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, respectively (S132). The random number value for each reel acquired in this process is a random number value for randomly determining the wait time until the start of the acceleration processing of each reel, and in the present embodiment, it is in the range of 0 to 20 (one). Random values are acquired by the number of symbols provided on the reel).

Next, the main CPU 51 accelerates the left reel 3L (S133). In this process, the acceleration process of the left reel 3L is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time (the period during which the game operation cannot be performed) based on the random number value for the left reel (S134). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time after the acceleration process of the left reel 3L is started. In this embodiment, in S134, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the left reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S135). In S135, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S135 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S135.

On the other hand, in S135, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S135 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs acceleration processing of the middle reel 3C (S136). In this process, the acceleration process of the middle reel 3C is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time based on the random number value for the middle reel (S137). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time after the acceleration process of the middle reel 3C is started. In S137, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the middle reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S138). In S138, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S138 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S138.

On the other hand, in S138, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S138 is YES), the main CPU 51 accelerates the right reel 3R (S139). In this process, the acceleration process of the right reel 3R is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time based on the random number value for the right reel (S140). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time after the acceleration process of the right reel 3R is started. In S140, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the right reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S141). In S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S141.

Then, in S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the random acceleration process, and the process is a flowchart of the reel rotation start process (FIG. 94). (See) Move to S123 in. As described above, in the present embodiment, the wait time is determined for each reel based on the random value, and the wait time is digested. Therefore, the reel acceleration operation after the reel production is random acceleration.

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 53 (S151). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S152). In this process, the main CPU 51 selects, for example, a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in S152, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S161 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when returning to S152 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S161 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S152 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S153). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S154). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S155). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of effective lines are stored. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 60) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 64) (S156). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, which is prepared in advance, or the displayable combination may be acquired from the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 20) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S157). In this process, the main CPU 51 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 60) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 57).

In addition, when the symbol of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination related to "C_CL apple 07", "C_XU apple 07" and "C_XU apple 08": see FIG. 20) is displayed on some reels, In the reel that becomes "ANY", the attraction priority data of the combination is not acquired. In addition, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won internally will be determined on the reel for which the winning is confirmed, the attraction priority data is set to "stop prohibited (all bits 0)".

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 66) (S158). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the symbol check count (S159).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S160). When the main CPU 51 determines in S160 that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when the determination in S160 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S155 and repeats the processes after S155.

On the other hand, in S160, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S160 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S161).

When it is determined in S161 that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S152 and repeats the processes after S152. On the other hand, in S161, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 87). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S153 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S6) (S171). ). When the main CPU 51 determines in S171 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process moves to S154 of the process (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority table number is not set (when the determination in S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 63) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 62) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S172). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S154 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 96).

In S172, first, the main CPU 51 acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button by referring to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S155 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the valid line data (S181). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S182). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S183). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S156 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 96).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the reel stop control process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 51 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S191 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S191, when the main CPU 51 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 51 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 63) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 63). 62) is updated (S192). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S193).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S194). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S195).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S196). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42 (S197). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S196, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 53 (S198). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S198 as the search symbol position (S199). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 98 (S200). After that, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 64) using the acquired symbol code (S201).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S202). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S203). In S203, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S203 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S203 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

On the other hand, in S203, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S203 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S197. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S204 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S197.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S205). When the main CPU 51 determines in S205 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S205 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 96 (S206). ). After that, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S191 and repeats the processes after S191.

On the other hand, in S205, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S205 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 87). (See), move to S12.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the slip piece number determination process performed in S196 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 99) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S211). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects "00010000" as the line mask data in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is "2") (S212). When the main CPU 51 determines in S212 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S212 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processes (S213). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S221 described later.

On the other hand, in S212, when the main CPU 51 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S212 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S214).

In S214, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S214 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S215). In this process, the forward-pressed table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 38 to 40). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the stop table for the first stop at the time of the forward push corresponding to the table selection data at the time of the forward push, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S216). After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S221 described later.

On the other hand, in S214, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S214 is NO), the main CPU 51 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S217). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 38 to 40).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S218). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S219). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S220).

Then, after the processing of S213, S216 or S220, the main CPU 51 performs the priority pull-in control processing (S221). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S197 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 99).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the second and third stop processes performed in S213 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 100) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S231). When the main CPU 51 determines in S231 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S234 described later.

On the other hand, in S231, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 51 pushes the stop button forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S232). In S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S232 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S234 described later.

On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S233). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later.

Then, after the processing of S233, or when S231 or S232 determines NO, the main CPU 51 performs the line mask data change processing (S234). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number search process (S235). In this process, the number of slip pieces is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 47 to 51).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 51 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S235, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S221 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 100).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the line change bit performed in S218 in the flowchart of the number of sliding pieces determination process (see FIG. 100) and S233 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 101). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S241). In S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S241 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S242). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S242, the main CPU 51 finishes the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S219 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 100) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 101). ) Moves to the processing of S234.

On the other hand, in S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S241 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S243). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 47 to 51), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S243 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the line change bit check process. Is completed, and the process is transferred to S219 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 100) or S234 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S243, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S243 is YES), the main CPU 51 is B. Set the line status (S244). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S244, the main CPU 51 finishes the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S219 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 100) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 101). ) Moves to the processing of S234.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the line mask data performed in S219 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 100) and S234 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 101). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S251). The C-line status is set when the touch is forward in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 106), which will be described later.

In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S252).

In S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S253). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S253 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the row of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIGS. 47 to 51) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 51 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S220 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 100) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 101). ) Move to the processing of S235.

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S254). If the touch is forward and the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the process of S254 changes the line mask data from "00010000" to "01000000". As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S254, the main CPU 51 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S220 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 100) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 101). ) Move to the processing of S235.

Here, returning to the process of S251 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S251 that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S251 is NO), the B line status is set in the main CPU 51. Whether or not it is determined (S255). When the main CPU 51 determines in S255 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S255 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. Move to the process of S220 in (see 100) or S235 in the flowchart (see FIG. 101) of the second and third stop processes.

On the other hand, in S255, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S255 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S256). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 47 to 51) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S256, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S220 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 100) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 101). ) Move to the processing of S235.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the priority pull-in control process performed in S221 in the flowchart (see FIG. 100) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIG. 58) according to the game state (S261). Next, the main CPU 51 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S262). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S263).

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S264). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S265).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S265 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S266). In S266, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S265 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S266 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S268 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S266, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S265 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S266 is YES), the main CPU 51 slips acquired in S264. The number of pieces is evacuated (S267).

Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S268).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S269). In S269, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S269 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S264 and repeats the processes after S264.

On the other hand, in S269, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S269 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S270). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 100).

[Control change processing]
Next, the control change process performed in S202 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 99) will be described with reference to FIG. 105.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S281). In S281, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S281 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and performs the process in S203 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 99). Move to.

On the other hand, in S281, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S281 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S281). In S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the control process after the second stop (S283). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later. Then, after the processing of S283, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S203 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 99).

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the touch is forward (S284). When the main CPU 51 determines in S284 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S284 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S203 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 99). ..

On the other hand, in S284, when the main CPU 51 determines that the touch is forward (when the determination in S284 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the forward push control change table (see FIGS. 43 to 46) and the number of searches. (S285).

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the planned stop position (S286). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S287).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S287 coincides with the scheduled stop position (S288). In S288, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S288 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S289). When the main CPU 51 determines in S289 that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S289 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S287 and repeats the processes after S287.

On the other hand, in S289, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S289 is YES), the main CPU 51 presses the value of the table change initial data at the time of the forward press to the second. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stopping, and the corresponding stop table is set (S290). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the change status to "0" (S291). Then, after the processing of S291, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S203 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 99).

Here, returning to the process of S288 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S288 that the updated change target position matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S288 is YES), the main CPU 51 is in the line change status. Acquires the second and third stop table numbers and C-line check data corresponding to the values at the time of forward pressing (S292). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S293). Then, after the processing of S293, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S203 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 99).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the second post-stop control change process performed in S283 in the flow chart of the control change process (see FIG. 105) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the push is forward (S301). When the main CPU 51 determines in S301 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S301 that the main CPU 51 is a forward push (when the determination in S301 is YES), whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not in the main CPU 51. (S302). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S292 of the control change process (see FIG. 105). Then, in S302, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S302 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process. To do.

On the other hand, in S302, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S302 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S303). When the main CPU 51 determines in S303 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S303, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 51 is in the stored forward press. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S304). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S305). Then, after the process of S305, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process.

[Prize search process]
Next, the winning search process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. In the winning search process, a process of determining whether or not to continue the game in the ART state is performed by lottery, and this process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for executing the continuous lottery of ART (special game continuous lottery means).

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay has won a prize (S311). When the main CPU 51 determines in S311 that the winning combination related to the replay has not won a prize (when the determination in S311 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S313 described later. On the other hand, in S311 when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the replay has won a prize (when the determination in S311 is YES), the main CPU 51 makes an automatic medal insertion request (S312).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a combination related to the abbreviation “F_lip G9” (internal winning combination corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointer “30”. See FIG. 23) (see FIG. 23). S313). In S313, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a combination related to the abbreviation "F_lip G9" (when the determination in S313 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S317 described later.

On the other hand, in S313, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a combination related to the abbreviation "F_lip G9" (when the determination in S313 is YES), the main CPU 51 is effective in combining the symbols of "clown matching". It is determined whether or not it is displayed on the line (S314). In S314, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is displayed on the effective line (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S317 described later.

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is not displayed on the effective line (the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is missed) (when the determination in S314 is NO), The main CPU 51 updates the missing flag to "1" (S315). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the reel effect counter to "1" (S316).

After the processing of S316, if S313 is a NO determination or S314 is a YES determination, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the "RT5 transition combination" has won a prize (S317). The "RT5 transition combination" is a replay combination defined in the RT transition table of FIG. 21 that triggers a transition from the RT state to the RT5 state ("pseudo-bonus"). "Replay B" ("C_BB rip 01" to "C_BB rip 13" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20), "Replay R" ("C_RB rip" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20) 01 "to" C_RB Lip 13 ")," Replay P "(" C_PB Lip 01 "to" C_PB Lip 09 "in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20)," Replay 6 "(FIGS. 7 to 20) It is a role related to "C_RT5 rip 01" to "C_RT5 rip 18") and the like in the symbol combination table shown in.

In S317, when the main CPU 51 determines that the "RT5 transition combination" has not won a prize (when the determination in S317 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 87). Move to S13.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 51 determines that the "RT5 transition combination" has won a prize (when the determination in S317 is YES), that is, when the gaming state shifts to the "pseudo bonus" (ART state), the main CPU 51 Performs ART continuous lottery processing (S318). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the ART continuation lottery table of FIG. 74 and acquires the values (“0” to “5”) of the ART continuation generation flag and counter by lottery.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter with the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter acquired in S319 (S319). Then, after the process of S319, the main CPU 51 ends the winning search process and shifts the process to S13 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[RT control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the RT control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described. In this embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (replay time state control means) for executing the RT control process.

First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 21) and checks the transition conditions of the RT state that can be established in the RT state of the migration source (current) (S321).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied (S322). In S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition condition of the RT state is not satisfied (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S324 described later.

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied (when the determination of YES in S322), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 21) and the transition condition. Based on the above, the RT state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 61), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S323).

In the present embodiment, although not shown, the main RAM 53 is provided with a game state flag storage area storage area for storing the RT transition state. In the game state flag storage area storage area, information about the RT state for two times can be stored, and information about the RT state before the transition and information about the RT state after the transition can be stored.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the RT state is a transition from the RT3 state to the RT1 state (S324). That is, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state has fallen from the "pseudo BB flag interval" to the "normal state".

In S324, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the RT state is not the transition from the RT3 state to the RT1 state (when the determination in S324 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S326 described later. On the other hand, in S324, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the RT state is the transition from the RT3 state to the RT1 state (when the determination in S324 is YES), that is, the game state is changed from "between the pseudo BB flags" to ". When it falls to the "normal state", the main CPU 51 updates the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags to "1" (S325).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition from the RT state is from the RT4 state to the RT1 state (S326). That is, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state has fallen from the "pseudo RB flag interval" to the "normal state". In S326, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the RT state is not the transition from the RT4 state to the RT1 state (when the determination in S326 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S328 described later.

On the other hand, in S326, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the RT state is the transition from the RT4 state to the RT1 state (when the determination of S326 is YES), that is, the game state is changed from "between the pseudo RB flags" to ". When the state falls to the "normal state", the main CPU 51 updates the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags to "2" (S327).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the RT state is a transition from the RT1 state to the RT6 state (S328). That is, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the game state has changed from "between pseudo BB flags" or "between RB flags" to "normal state" and then to "pseudo bonus relief state". .. In S328, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition from the RT state is not the transition from the RT1 state to the RT6 state (when the determination in S328 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S330 described later.

On the other hand, in S328, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the RT state is the transition from the RT1 state to the RT6 state (when the determination in S328 is YES), that is, the game state is "between pseudo BB flags" or ". When the state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" after falling from the "RB flag interval" to the "normal state", the main CPU 51 updates the relief flag to "1" (S329). The relief flag is a flag indicating whether or not the RT state has changed from the RT1 state to the RT6 state due to the relief measure, and is stored in the main RAM 53. When the relief flag is "1", a reel effect ("pseudo bonus winning pretending effect") is performed in the first game in the transferred RT6 state.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a display command transmission process (S330). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S330, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S15 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[RT game number processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the RT game number processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described. During the RT game number processing, an additional lottery process for the number of ART games is performed using the additional lottery table, and this process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (game number addition lottery means) for executing the additional lottery process for the number of ART games.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT state is the RT5 state (S341). In S341, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT state is not the RT5 state (when the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S347 described later. On the other hand, in S341, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (when the determination in S341 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is "1" or more. Determine (S342). The ART game number counter is a counter for managing the number of ART games in the main control circuit 41, and is provided in the main RAM 53.

In S342, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S342 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S347 described later. On the other hand, in S342, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S342 is YES), the main CPU 51 is a "specific combination" that triggers the execution of the additional lottery. Determines whether or not the player has won the internal prize (S343).

In the present embodiment, in the game during the "pseudo-bonus", the small winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointers "31" to "51" (abbreviated as "F_bell ALL", "F_medium bell") related to the "bell" When any of the internal winning combinations corresponding to "1" to "F_middle bell 4" and "F_right bell 1" to "F_right bell 4") wins internally, the number of ART games is added to the lottery. Therefore, in S343, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the small winning combination related to the "bell" has been internally won.

In S343, when the main CPU 51 determines that the "specific combination" has not been internally won (when the determination in S343 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S347 described later.

On the other hand, in S343, when the main CPU 51 determines that the "specific combination" is internally won (when the determination in S343 is YES), the main CPU 51 is based on the additional lottery table (see FIG. 73), and the ART game. An additional lottery is performed (S344). By this process, the value (“0” to “11”) of the additional generation flag and type corresponding to the number of additional games is acquired. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the addition generation flag / type acquired in S344 is "1" or more (S345).

In S345, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is not "1" or more (when the determination in S345 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S347 described later. On the other hand, in S345, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is "1" or more (when the determination in S345 is YES), that is, when the above-mentioned reel effect is won, the main CPU 51 , The value of the addition generation flag and type acquired by the addition lottery of S344 is stored in the reel effect counter (S346).

After the processing of S346, or when S341, S342, S343 or S345 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 51 performs ART game number addition processing (S347). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs an addition process of the ART game number counter according to, for example, the current winning status, various flags, and the value of the discriminator. The details of the ART game number addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is "1" or more (S348). In S348, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S348 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT game number processing and performs the processing in the main flow (FIG. 87), move to S16.

On the other hand, in S348, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S348 is YES), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (when the determination is YES). S349). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the subtracted ART game number counter (ART game number) is "0" (S350).

In S350, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S350 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT game number processing and performs the processing in the main flow (FIG. 87). (See), move to S16. On the other hand, in S350, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S350 is YES), the main CPU 51 has the value of the ART continuation generation flag and counter "1". It is determined whether or not it is the above (S351).

In S351, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT game number processing and performs the processing in the main flow. Move to S16 (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S351, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the value of the reel effect counter to "1". Update to (S352). Next, the main CPU 51 adds "100" to the value of the ART game number counter (S353). Then, after the processing of S353, the main CPU 51 ends the RT game number processing, and shifts the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[ART game number addition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the ART game number addition process performed in S347 in the flowchart of the RT game number processing (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the combination related to "Replay B" ("C_BB Lip 01" to "C_BB Lip 13" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 20) has won a prize (S361). .. In S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to "Replay B" has won a prize (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination related to "Replay B" is stopped and displayed on the valid line) (S361 is a YES determination). Case), the main CPU 51 adds "101" to the value of the ART game number counter (S362).

In the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to "Replay B" is won and the "pseudo-bonus" is started, 100 ART games are added, but the number of ART games is increased in S349 of the RT game number processing of FIG. 109. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1. Therefore, in S362, a value (101) obtained by adding 1 to the number of added games 100 of the "pseudo-bonus" is added to the ART game number counter. In each of the various addition processes (S364, S366, S368, S370, S372, and S374) of the ART game number counter described below, for the same reason, a value obtained by adding 1 to the corresponding number of added games is added to the ART game. Add to the value of the number counter.

Then, after the processing of S362, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart (see FIG. 109) of the RT game number processing.

On the other hand, in S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to "Replay B" has not won (when the determination in S361 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines the winning combination related to "Replay R" (FIGS. 7 to 7). It is determined whether or not "C_RB rip 01" to "C_RB rip 13") in the symbol combination table shown in 20 has won a prize (S363).

In S363, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to "Replay R" has won a prize (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination related to "Replay R" is stopped and displayed on the valid line) (S363 is a YES determination). Case), the main CPU 51 adds "51" to the value of the ART game number counter (S364). Then, after the processing of S364, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart of the RT game number processing (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S363, when the main CPU 51 determines that the combination related to "Replay R" has not won a prize (when the determination in S363 is NO), the main CPU 51 has a combination related to "Replay P" (FIGS. 7 to 7). It is determined whether or not "C_PB rip 01" to "C_PB rip 09") in the symbol combination table shown in 20 has won a prize (S365).

In S365, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to "Replay P" has won a prize (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination related to "Replay P" is stopped and displayed on the valid line) (S365 is a YES determination). Case), the main CPU 51 adds "251" to the value of the ART game number counter (S366). Then, after the processing of S366, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart (see FIG. 109) of the RT game number processing.

On the other hand, in S365, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to "Replay P" has not won a prize (when the determination in S365 is NO), the main CPU 51 has a discriminator at the time of transition between flags from "2" to "2". It is determined whether or not the update has been made to "0" (S367).

In S367, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inter-flag transition discriminator has been updated from "2" to "0" (when the determination in S367 is YES), that is, the game state changes from "between pseudo-RB flags" to ". When the gaming state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" by the relief measure after falling to the "normal state", the main CPU 51 adds "51" to the value of the ART game number counter (S368). Then, after the processing of S368, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart (see FIG. 109) of the RT game number processing.

On the other hand, in S367, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inter-flag transition discriminator has not been updated from "2" to "0" (when S367 determines NO), the main CPU 51 determines the inter-flag transition time. It is determined whether or not the child has been updated from "1" to "0" (S369).

In S369, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inter-flag transition discriminator has been updated from "1" to "0" (when the determination in S369 is YES), that is, the game state changes from "between pseudo-BB flags" to ". When the game state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus relief state" by the relief measure after falling to the "normal state", the main CPU 51 adds "101" to the value of the ART game number counter (S370). Then, after the processing of S370, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart (see FIG. 109) of the RT game number processing.

On the other hand, in S369, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inter-flag transition discriminator has not been updated from "1" to "0" (when the determination in S369 is NO), the main CPU 51 has the missing flag set to "1". It is determined whether or not the update has been made from "" to "0" (S371).

In S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the missing flag has been updated from "1" to "0" (the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is stopped and displayed on the valid line) (when the determination in S371 is YES). ), The main CPU 51 adds "251" to the value of the ART game number counter (S372). Then, after the processing of S372, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart of the RT game number processing (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the missing flag has not been updated from "1" to "0" (when the determination in S371 is NO), the main CPU 51 has the value of the addition generation flag and type " It is determined whether or not it is 2 ”or more (S373). In S373, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is not "2" or more (when the determination in S373 is NO), that is, when the addition lottery for the number of ART games is not won, the main CPU 51 Ends the ART game number addition process, and shifts the process to S348 of the flowchart of the RT game number process (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S373, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the addition generation flag and type is "2" or more (when the determination in S373 is YES), that is, when the number of ART games is added to the lottery, the main The CPU 51 adds a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of ART additional games (50 to 500) corresponding to the value of the additional generation flag and type to the value of the ART game number counter (S374). Then, after the processing of S374, the main CPU 51 ends the ART game number addition processing, and shifts the processing to S348 of the flowchart of the RT game number processing (see FIG. 109).

[Production control process at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the effect control process at the end of the game performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "1" or "2" (S381). In S381, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S381 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the process at the end of the game. , The process is transferred to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S381, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the discriminator at the time of transition between flags is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S381 is YES), the relief flag of the main CPU 51 is "1". It is determined whether or not it is (S382). In S382, when the main CPU 51 determines that the relief flag is not "1" (when the determination in S382 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end production process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 87). Move to S17.

On the other hand, in S382, when the main CPU 51 determines that the relief flag is "1" (when the determination in S382 is YES), the main CPU 51 updates the value of the reel effect counter to "1" (S383). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the relief flag to "0" (S384). Then, after the processing of S384, the main CPU 51 ends the processing at the time of the production at the end of the game, and shifts the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, for example, a periodic interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 performed in S9 in the main flow (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S391). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S392). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S393). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S394). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S395). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, not only the normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, but also the various reel effects (reel action effect and symbol display effect) described above during the reel acceleration processing of the game in the RT5 state or the RT6 state. If is set, the control process of the reel effect is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp 7-segment drive process (S396). In this process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register reset process (S397). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 118, the contents of the main processing (task) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 by using the program will be described.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 113.

First, the sub CPU 81 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (S401). Next, when the sub CPU 81 receives the command, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S402).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S403). In S403, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not received a command different from the previous one (when the determination in S403 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S401 and repeats the processes after S401.

On the other hand, in S403, when the sub CPU 81 determines that a command different from the previous one has been received (when the determination in S403 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S404). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S404, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S401 and repeats the processing after S401.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

First, the sub CPU 81 retrieves a message from the message queue (S411). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S412). In S412, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S412 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S415 described later.

On the other hand, in S412, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S412 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies the game information from the message (S413). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect content determination process (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the animation data (S415). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the sound data (S416). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the lamp data (S417). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S414. Then, after S417, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S411 and repeats the processing after S411.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the effect content determination process performed in S414 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command is received (S421).

In S421, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the start command is received (YES in S421), the sub CPU 81 performs the start command reception process (S422). In this process, the sub CPU 81 extracts the effect random value, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S423). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data or the like is determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S423, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S421, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S421 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S424).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S424 that the reel stop command is being received (when the determination in S424 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is stopped according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button. Register the production data (S425). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S424, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S424 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S426).

In S426, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the display command is being received (when the determination in S426 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the display command reception processing (S427). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination (S428). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S426, when it is determined that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S426 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S429). In S429, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S429 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S430). Then, after the processing of S430, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S429, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S429 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the pseudo bonus start command is received (S431).

In S431, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus start command has been received (YES in S431), the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data for starting the pseudo bonus (S432). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S431, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the pseudo bonus start command is received (when the determination in S431 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the pseudo bonus end command is received (S433). .. When the sub CPU 81 determines in S433 that it is not the time when the pseudo bonus end command is received (when the determination in S433 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the effect registration task (see FIG. 114). Move to S415.

On the other hand, in S433, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the time when the pseudo bonus end command is received (when the determination in S433 is YES), the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data for the end of the pseudo bonus (S434). Then, after the processing of S434, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 114).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S422 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 115) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" ("initial state", "normal state", or "chance zone") (S441).

In S441, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the gaming state is not the "normal gaming state" (when the determination in S441 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S443 described later. On the other hand, in S441, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (when the determination in S441 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing during the normal gaming state (S442). The details of the processing during the normal gaming state will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs AT processing (S443). In this process, when the game state is the "ART preparation state" ("pseudo-bonus high probability state", "pseudo BB flag" or "pseudo RB flag"), the sub CPU 81 sets the game state to "pseudo". The navigation is performed so that the symbol combination related to the replay combination (“Replay B” or “Replay R”) for shifting to the “bonus” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, when the gaming state is the "ART state", that is, when the gaming state is the "pseudo-bonus" or the "pseudo-bonus relief state", the sub CPU 81 is effective in combining the symbols of the small winning combination related to the payout of medals. Navigate so that it is stopped and displayed on the line. Further, in the process of S443, the sub CPU 81 manages the number of ART games grasped by the main CPU 51, and when the number of ART games is subtracted, the subtraction operation is also displayed.

Then, after the processing of S443, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S423 of the flowchart (see FIG. 115) of the effect content determination processing.

[Processing during normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the processing during the normal gaming state performed in S442 in the flowchart (see FIG. 116) of the processing at the time of receiving the start command will be described. In the normal game state process, a process of counting the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination and managing the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for counting the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination (means for counting the number of consecutive winnings of the predetermined combination).

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a replay combination (S451). Specifically, in the sub CPU 81, the internal winning combination is the small winning combination / replay data pointers “2” to “9” (“F_lip G1A” to “F_lip G3_321” in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 22 to 24. ":" Replay G1 "," Replay G2 "," Replay G3 "), and" 22 "to" 30 "(" F_Rip G8_1XXXA "to" F_Rip G9 ":" Replay G8 "," Replay G9 ") It is determined whether or not it is an internal winning combination corresponding to any of the above.

In S451, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not a replay combination (when the determination in S451 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S456 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the replay combination (when the determination in S451 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the replay counter (S452).

Next, the sub CPU 81 refers to the AT lottery table (see FIG. 71) at the time of continuous replay winning based on the information of the current mode (“normal mode”, “high accuracy mode” or “ultra high accuracy mode”). A lottery is performed (S453). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT lottery has been won (S454).

In S454, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT lottery has been won (when the determination in S454 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the ART transition navigation flag (S455). By this process, the sub CPU 81 sets a navigation for shifting the RT state to the RT2 state (“pseudo-bonus high probability state”). Then, after the processing of S455, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during the normal game state, and shifts the processing to S443 of the flowchart (see FIG. 116) of the processing at the time of receiving the start command.

On the other hand, in S454, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT lottery has not been won (when the determination in S454 is NO), or when the determination in S451 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the replay counter to "0". Update to (S456). Then, after the processing of S456, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during the normal game state, and shifts the processing to S443 of the flowchart (see FIG. 116) of the processing at the time of receiving the start command.

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the display command reception processing performed in S427 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 115) will be described. In the process of receiving the display command, a process of comparing the number of consecutive wins of the replay combination with the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for comparing the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination and the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination (continuous winning number comparison means). Further, in the display command reception processing, a mode transition lottery processing is also performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for executing the mode transition lottery process (lottery mode selection means).

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" ("initial state", "normal state", or "chance zone") (S461). In S461, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the gaming state is not the "normal gaming state" (when the determination in S461 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S465 described later.

On the other hand, in S461, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (when the determination in S461 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" on the effective line. It is determined whether or not it is displayed (S462).

In addition, "when the start symbol combination of the pseudo bonus is displayed" here means "the start symbol combination of the pseudo bonus" ("red 7 match", "RB match" or "clown" as a display combination (winning). This includes not only the case where the "matching" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, but also the case where the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" is displayed in the reel effect performed during the reel acceleration process.

In S462, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" is not displayed (when the determination in S462 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S465 described later.

On the other hand, in S462, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" is displayed (when the determination in S462 is YES), that is, the gaming state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state). If so, the sub CPU 81 performs a mode transition lottery (S463). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines a lottery value corresponding to the value of each replay counter defined in the AT lottery table (see FIG. 71) at the time of continuous winning of replays (“normal mode”, “high accuracy mode””. And any of the "ultra-high accuracy modes") are determined with reference to the mode lottery table shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, a mode for determining the probability of winning the AT (probability of winning the transition navigation to the RT2 state) at the time of continuous replay winning is set by this process. Then, in the present embodiment, in the set mode, in the "normal game state" after the end of the "pseudo-bonus", the symbol combination that triggers the start of the "pseudo-bonus" is displayed again, and the mode transition lottery is performed. Is maintained until.

Next, the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART transition navigation flag (S464). Then, after the processing of S464, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and shifts the processing to S428 of the flowchart (see FIG. 115) of the effect content determination processing.

When the determination in S461 or S462 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display combination is a display combination related to "replay" (S465). In S465, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the display combination is not the display combination related to "replay" (when the determination in S465 is NO), the sub CPU 81 updates the value of the sub replay counter to "0" (S469). .. The sub-replay counter is a counter for managing the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination in the sub-control circuit 42, and is provided in the sub-RAM 83. Then, after the processing of S469, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and shifts the processing to S428 of the flowchart (see FIG. 115) of the effect content determination processing.

On the other hand, in S465, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the display combination is the display combination related to "replay" (when the determination in S465 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the sub replay counter (S466). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the replay counter is equal to the value of the sub replay counter (S467). By this process, it can be determined whether or not the display combination is equal to the internal winning combination.

In S467, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the replay counter is equal to the value of the sub replay counter (when the determination in S467 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and determines the production content. The process is transferred to S428 of the flowchart (see FIG. 115).

On the other hand, in S467, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the replay counter is not equal to the value of the sub replay counter (when the determination in S467 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs an error notification (S468). Then, after the processing of S468, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and shifts the processing to S428 of the flowchart (see FIG. 115) of the effect content determination processing.

<Various effects>
Here, various features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and various effects obtained thereby will be collectively described.

[Various effects obtained by reel production]
(1) Effect of "Clown Missing Production" and "Pseudo Bonus Winning Pretending Production" As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, "Replay G9" (winning number "30": abbreviation "F_lip G9") When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination ("Replay P" and "Replay 6") included in is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the game state is "ART state"("pseudobonus"). Move to. At this time, in the present embodiment, as the symbol combination related to the replay combination included in the "replay G9", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination of the "clown matching" is also set. Therefore, when the replay role included in "Replay G9" is internally won and the "Clown Match" symbol combination cannot be displayed on the valid line (when the "Clown Match" symbol combination is missed). Even if there is, the game state shifts to the "ART state"("pseudobonus") when the symbol combination other than the "clown matching" related to the replay role included in the "replay G9" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts to the "ART state" in such a transition mode, in the reel acceleration processing of the next unit game (ART start game) of the unit game in which the "replay G9" has won a prize. , Perform a reel effect ("Clown dropout effect") that displays the "Clown match" symbol combination ("Pseudo bonus start symbol combination") on the effective line (center line), and the game state shifts to "ART state". Notify the player of what has been done.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the predetermined "ART preparation state" ("between the pseudo BB flags" or "between the pseudo RB flags"), the "pseudo bonus start symbol combination" ("red 7 alignment" or "red 7 alignment" or If the symbol combination of "RB alignment") cannot be displayed on the effective line and the symbol combination related to "special bell missing" is displayed on the effective line, the game state falls to the "normal state". However, after that, when the symbol combination related to "Replay 4" is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the "normal state" by the relief measure, the game state shifts to the "ART state" ("pseudo bonus relief state"). ..

Then, in the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the "ART state" in such a transition mode, the reel acceleration process of the next unit game (ART start game) of the unit game in which "Replay 4" wins is performed. A reel effect that displays the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" ("pseudo-bonus 7-match" or "RB-match" symbol combination) corresponding to the type of "ART preparation state" before the fall on the center line ("pseudo-bonus prize" The player is notified that the gaming state has changed to the "ART state" by performing a "fake effect").

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" cannot be stopped and displayed, the symbol combinations other than the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" are finally stopped and displayed. Therefore, the gaming state can be changed to the "ART state". Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts to the "ART state" by such a transition path, the "pseudo-bonus start symbol combination" is displayed on the effective line in the reel acceleration process of the ART start game. The reel is produced to notify the player that the game state has changed to the "ART state".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even for a player who is unfamiliar with the eye-catching, ART is easily given (hard to be damaged), and the player can easily grasp that the privilege of ART is given by the reel production. Can be done. As a result, even a player who is unfamiliar with the eye-catching can play the game with peace of mind, suppress the decline in the motivation to play, and prevent the player from leaving the game. Further, this can suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine and reduce the loss of the game store.

Further, in the "pseudo-bonus winning pretending effect" of the present embodiment, the content of the reel effect is changed according to the type of the "ART preparation state" before the fall of the gaming state. Specifically, when the "ART preparation state" before the fall is "between the pseudo BB flags", the symbol display effect of "center line red 7 alignment" is performed in the "pseudo bonus winning pretending effect". On the other hand, when the ART preparation state before the fall is "between the pseudo RB flags", the symbol display effect of "center line RB alignment" is performed in the "pseudo bonus winning pretending effect".

In this case, the reel effect allows the player to easily grasp the type of "ART preparation state" before the fall, and can also confirm the content of the ART to be given.

(2) Effect of "additional effect" As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific combination (small combination related to "bell") is won in the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state), the number of ART games Make an additional lottery. Then, when the additional lottery is won, the content of the "addition effect" (the combination of symbols to be displayed and the display line) is determined based on the number of additional games (value of the additional generation flag and type).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player can easily confirm the number of added ART games by the "additional effect". Further, even if the symbols are not aligned at the start of rotation of the reels, it is possible to easily display a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the determined number of additional games by the reel effect.

(3) Effect of "Continued Confirmation Production" As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state), an ART continuous lottery is performed, and the ART continuous lottery is performed. In the case of winning, a reel effect ("continuation confirmation effect") is performed in the reel acceleration process at the start of the next "pseudo-bonus" set to be continued (the next unit game after the final unit game of the current ART set). , Notify the player that the continuation of ART is confirmed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to separately provide a unit game for performing a reel effect for notifying that the ART continuation is confirmed from the end of the ART game period in which the ART continuation is confirmed to the start of the next unit game. .. That is, in the present embodiment, from the end of the ART game period in which the ART continuation is confirmed to before the start of the next unit game, the ART continuation is confirmed by the reel effect for the player without sandwiching a useless unit game. It is possible to notify that it is doing.

[Effects obtained from the lottery value change table for RT1]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery value is changed to change the lottery value setting of the small role / replay data pointer "2" (winning number "2": abbreviation "F_rip G1A"). A table (see FIG. 25) is provided. Based on this lottery value change table, the main specific symbols of the left reel 3L constituting the display role that triggers the transition from the "normal game state" to the "pseudo bonus" (ART state) (in this embodiment, in FIG. 6). The probability that "Apple 2" at symbol position "5", "Red 7" at symbol position "4" and "Apple 2" at symbol position "3") will be displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L can be changed. it can.

Then, in the lottery value change table of the present embodiment, the lottery value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" (winning number "2") is set to increase as the set numerical value (1 to 6) increases. Has been done. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the additional lottery table (see FIG. 73) for the number of ART games is linked with the set value of the lottery value change table, and as the set value increases, the winning probability of the additional lottery also increases. The lottery value is set to increase.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the numerical value of the setting, the frequency of occurrence of the "additional effect" increases, and the winning probability of the role that triggers the transition to the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state) increases. .. In this case, in the "pseudo-bonus", it is possible to predict the numerical value of the current setting by grasping the frequency at which the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L.

[Various effects obtained by output specifications to the external centralized terminal board]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the output specifications to the external centralized terminal board of FIG. 86, when a predetermined symbol combination (“pseudo-bonus start symbol combination”) is stopped and displayed. An external signal is transmitted to the external centralized terminal board. Further, in the present embodiment, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed to shift to the ART state, when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the reel effect, an external signal is sent to the external centralized terminal board. Send.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when a predetermined symbol combination (“pseudo-bonus start symbol combination”) is not displayed, the number of transitions to the ART state can be accurately counted.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the output specifications to the external centralized terminal board of FIG. 86, a predetermined symbol combination is performed by the "continuation confirmation effect" (reel effect) performed when the continuation of ART is confirmed. Even when it is displayed, an external signal is transmitted to the external centralized terminal board. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of ARTs can be accurately counted from the end of the ART game period in which the ART continuation is confirmed to the start of the next unit game without interposing a useless unit game.

[Various effects obtained by ART transition based on the number of consecutive replay prizes]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of counting the number of consecutive replay winnings in the "normal gaming state". Then, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination wins (operates) consecutively a predetermined number of times, the probability of shifting the gaming state to the ART state (“pseudo-bonus”) increases in the “pseudo-bonus high probability state” (RT2). Navi to shift the game state to state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination wins (operates) consecutively a predetermined number of times, the granting of ART is substantially confirmed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as one of the "normal game states", a "chance zone" in which the replay combination wins with a high probability is provided. Therefore, in the "chance zone", the player can play the game with the expectation of acquiring ART.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination wins consecutively a predetermined number of times in the "normal game state", the game state is directly changed from the "normal game state" to the "ART state" (RT5 or RT6 state). You may try to navigate. Then, when the game state shifts to the "ART state", a predetermined symbol combination ("red 7 alignment") is displayed on a predetermined line (for example, center line) in the reel acceleration process at the start of the ART game. You may try to make a reel effect. When such a function is provided, the player can directly shift the gaming state from the "normal gaming state" ("normal state" or "chance zone") to the "ART state" by this reel effect. It can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of modes (lottery table) in which the probabilities of winning the AT lottery performed at the time of continuous replay winning are different from each other are prepared. Specifically, three types of modes, "normal mode", "high accuracy mode" and "ultra high accuracy mode", are prepared. Then, this mode selection process (mode lottery process) is performed when the game state shifts to the ART state. Therefore, in the "normal game state" ("normal state") after the end of ART, the player can play the game with the expectation of winning the ART.

[Effect obtained by random acceleration processing]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after various reel effects for notification are completed, random acceleration processing is performed on each reel. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the reels from rotating in a state where the specific symbol combinations are aligned on the effective line after the reel production. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the winning frequency (advantage) of the winning combination among the players.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the reel random acceleration process (see FIG. 95), the random value for each reel for determining the wait time set for each reel is collectively acquired. To do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the number of processes for setting the wait time of each reel.

[Other effects]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 manages the information of the winning combination for each unit game, and also manages the number of consecutive winnings (replay counter) of the replay combination. Specifically, in the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 116), the information of the winning combination is confirmed, and based on the information of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the replay combination has won a predetermined number of times in a row. Will be done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately determine the information of the winning combination and the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display command reception processing (see FIG. 117), the information of the display combination (winning combination) is confirmed, and the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination (sub-replay counter) based on the information of the display combination. Also manage. Then, in the display command reception processing, the information regarding the winning combination (replay counter value) obtained by the start command reception processing and the display combination information (sub-replay counter value) obtained by the display command reception processing are obtained. They are compared and it is determined whether or not they match (see S467 in FIG. 117). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not an illegal act (goto act) has been performed between the start of the game and the end of the game by this determination process.

Further, since the information of the display combination (winning combination) is determined in the processing at the time of receiving the display command, the winning combination such as the combination related to the pressing order of the stop button (for example, the small winning combination related to the "bell" related to the pressing order) is won. And the winning can be judged accurately.

<Various deformation examples>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1) according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be included as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[Modification 1]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the random acceleration processing of reels performed after the reel production, all the random values for each reel for determining the time of the wait operation performed for each reel are collectively acquired before the acceleration processing of the reels. Although the example (see FIG. 95) has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. In the random acceleration process, for example, a random value for the corresponding reel may be acquired for each acceleration process of each reel. In the first modification, an example thereof will be described.

Since the internal configuration and arrangement of the pachislot machine 1 in this example, the configuration of various tables and various storage areas required for various processes are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description of these configurations will be omitted here. Further, since the processes (operations) other than the random acceleration process in this example are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description of those processes will be omitted, and only the random acceleration process will be described.

The random acceleration process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 119. In this example as well, the random acceleration process is performed in S122 in the flowchart of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 94, as in the above embodiment.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 0 (initial value of the reel action pattern) (S471). By this process, a normal acceleration process is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for the left reel (S472). In this example as well, a random number value for the left reel is acquired in the range of 0 to 20 as in the above embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 51 accelerates the left reel 3L (S473). In this process, the acceleration process of the left reel 3L is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time (the period during which the game operation cannot be performed) based on the random number value for the left reel (S474). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time after the acceleration process of the left reel 3L is started. Also in this example, similarly to the above embodiment, in S474, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the left reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S475). In S475, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S475 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S475.

On the other hand, in S475, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S475 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for the middle reel (S476). In this example as well, a random number value for the middle reel is acquired in the range of 0 to 20 as in the above embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 51 accelerates the middle reel 3C (S477). In this process, the acceleration process of the middle reel 3C is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time based on the random number value for the middle reel (S478). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time after the acceleration process of the middle reel 3C is started. Also in this example, similarly to the above embodiment, in S478, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the middle reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S479). In S479, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S479 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S479.

On the other hand, in S479, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S479 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for the right reel (S480). In this example as well, a random number value for the right reel is acquired in the range of 0 to 20 as in the above embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 51 accelerates the right reel 3R (S481). In this process, the acceleration process of the right reel 3R is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time based on the random value for the right reel (S482). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time after the acceleration process of the right reel 3R is started. Also in this example, similarly to the above embodiment, in S482, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the right reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S483). In S483, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S483 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S483.

Then, in S483, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S483 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the random acceleration process and performs the process in the flowchart of the reel rotation start process (FIG. 94). (See) Move to S123 in.

As described above, also in the first modification, the random acceleration process can be performed on each reel after the various reel effects for notification are completed. Therefore, in the first modification, similarly to the above embodiment, it is possible to prevent the reels from rotating in a state where the specific symbol combinations are aligned on the effective line after the reel effect. As a result, the difference in advantage that occurs between the player who is playing the game when the specific symbol combination is complete and the player who is playing the game when the specific symbol combination is not complete is eliminated. be able to.

[Modification 2]
In the random acceleration processing of the above-described embodiment and the above-described modification 1, an example in which a random value is acquired for each reel and the wait time of each reel is randomly set based on the random value has been described. Not limited to. For example, among the wait times set for each reel, the wait time for at least one reel may be set in advance as a predetermined wait time without using a random number value.

In the second modification, as an example thereof, the wait time for the left reel 3L is set to the minimum time of the wait time (0 msec), and the wait time for the right reel 3R is set to the maximum time of the wait time (20 × 32 × 1.1172 msec). = 715 msec). Then, in the second modification, the wait time for the middle reel 3C is randomly determined in the range between the minimum time (0 msec) and the maximum time (715 msec) based on the random value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the above-mentioned random acceleration process of the first modification, an example in which the digestion operation of the wait time set for the predetermined reel is performed after the acceleration process of the predetermined reel is completed has been described. Not limited to this. The digestion operation of the wait time set for the predetermined reel may be performed before the acceleration process of the predetermined reel. In the second modification, an example will be described in which the digestion operation of the wait time set for the predetermined reel is performed before the acceleration process of the predetermined reel. In addition, in the random acceleration process of the modification 2 described below, the digestion operation of the wait time set for the predetermined reel is performed on the predetermined reel as in the random acceleration process of the above embodiment and the above modification 1. This may be performed after the acceleration processing of is completed.

Further, since the internal configuration and arrangement of the pachislot machine 1 in this example, the configuration of various tables and various storage areas required for various processing are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description of these configurations will be omitted here. Further, since the processes (operations) other than the random acceleration process in this example are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description of those processes will be omitted, and only the random acceleration process will be described.

The random acceleration process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 120. In this example as well, the random acceleration process is performed in S122 in the flowchart of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 94, as in the above embodiment.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 0 (initial value of the reel action pattern) (S491). By this process, a normal acceleration process is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for the middle reel (S492). In this example as well, a random number value for the middle reel is acquired in the range of 0 to 20 as in the above embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 51 accelerates the left reel 3L (S493). In this process, the acceleration process of the left reel 3L is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time based on the random number value for the middle reel (S494). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time before the acceleration process of the middle reel 3C is started. Also in this example, similarly to the above embodiment, in S494, a random number value (0 to 20) × 32 × 1.1172 msec for the middle reel is set as the wait time.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S495). In S495, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S495 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S495.

On the other hand, in S495, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S495 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs acceleration processing of the middle reel 3C (S496). In this process, the acceleration process of the middle reel 3C is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the wait time (715 msec) for the right reel (S497). By this process, the digestion operation of the wait time before the acceleration process of the right reel 3R is started.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time has reached 0 msec (S498). In S498, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time is not 0 msec (when the determination in S498 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the determination process of S498.

On the other hand, in S498, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time has reached 0 msec (when the determination in S498 is YES), the main CPU 51 accelerates the right reel 3R (S499). In this process, the acceleration process of the right reel 3R is performed based on the set reel action pattern 0. Then, after the processing of S499, the main CPU 51 ends the random acceleration processing and shifts the processing to S123 in the flowchart (see FIG. 94) of the reel rotation start processing.

As described above, also in the second modification, the random acceleration process can be performed on each reel after the various reel effects for notification are completed. Therefore, in the second modification, similarly to the above embodiment, it is possible to prevent the reels from rotating in a state where the specific symbol combinations are aligned on the effective line after the reel effect. As a result, the difference in advantage that occurs between the player who is playing the game when the specific symbol combination is complete and the player who is playing the game when the specific symbol combination is not complete is eliminated. be able to.

Further, in the modification 2, since the process for randomly setting the wait time (random value acquisition process, etc.) is performed only on the middle reel 3C, the processing amount of the random acceleration process can be reduced. In this example, the wait time for the left reel 3L is set as the minimum wait time, the wait time for the right reel 3R is set as the maximum wait time, and the wait time for the middle reel 3C is randomly set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The combination of the reel and the wait time can be set arbitrarily.

[Modification 3]
In the random acceleration processing of the embodiment, the modification 1 and the modification 2, the wait time set for each reel is digested (random delay processing), so that a specific symbol combination is prepared after the reel production. The reel is prevented from rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any method can be used as long as it can prevent the reels from rotating in a state where a specific symbol combination is aligned after the reel production.

For example, after the reel effect is completed, the symbol combination on the effective line may be temporarily returned to the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the unit game immediately before the unit game in which the reel effect is performed. In this case as well, acceleration processing equivalent to the above-mentioned random acceleration processing can be performed on each reel. A modification will explain an example thereof.

Since the internal configuration and arrangement of the pachislot machine 1 in this example, the configuration of various tables and various storage areas required for various processes are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description of these configurations will be omitted here. Further, since the processes (operations) other than the random acceleration process in this example are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description of those processes will be omitted, and only the random acceleration process will be described.

The random acceleration process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In this example as well, the random acceleration process is performed in S122 in the flowchart of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 94, as in the above embodiment.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the reel action pattern 0 (initial value of the reel action pattern) (S501). By this process, a normal acceleration process is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the symbol stop position storage area (see FIG. 65) provided in the main RAM 53, and acquires the stop symbol position information of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R (S502). .. At this point (at the start of the game), the stop symbol position information of each reel stored in the symbol stop position storage area is the stop of the symbol displayed on the effective line after all the reels are stopped in the previous unit game. It is location information. Therefore, by the processing of S502, the stop position information of the symbol of each reel that is stopped and displayed in the unit game immediately before the current unit game in which the reel effect is performed can be obtained.

Next, the main CPU 51 simultaneously performs reel effect constant speed processing on all reels (S503). Specifically, the main CPU 51 controls the rotation of each reel according to the excitation pattern defined in the excitation data address “MGDAT_AP” in the excitation data table shown in FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 51 detects the reel index of the rotating predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 3L at first), and then based on the symbol stop position information of the predetermined reel in the previous unit game acquired in S502. A scheduled stop position of a predetermined reel is set (S504). Next, the main CPU 51 holds a predetermined reel at a set scheduled stop position (S504). In this reel holding process, the reel is made to appear to the player as if the reel is stopped by continuously inputting an excitation signal to the stepping motor that rotationally drives the predetermined reel and holding the reel at the stop symbol position.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the reels have been stopped (held) at the corresponding stop diagram positions (S506).

In S506, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels are not stopped (held) (when the determination in S506 is NO), the main CPU 51 changes the reel to be stopped and returns the process to S504, described above. The processing after S504 is repeated. On the other hand, in S506, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the reels are stopped (held) (when the determination in S506 is YES), the main CPU 51 simultaneously applies the reel action pattern 0 to all the reels. Acceleration processing (normal acceleration processing) based on the above is performed (S507). Then, after the processing of S507, the main CPU 51 ends the random acceleration processing, and shifts the processing to S123 in the flowchart (see FIG. 94) of the reel rotation start processing.

Also in the acceleration process of the above-described third modification, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to prevent the reels from rotating in a state where the specific symbol combinations are aligned on the effective line after the reel effect. As a result, the difference in advantage that occurs between the player who is playing the game when the specific symbol combination is complete and the player who is playing the game when the specific symbol combination is not complete is eliminated. be able to.

Further, in the modification 3, in the random acceleration process, the symbol combination displayed as stopped in the previous unit game is displayed, and the symbol stop position of each reel is temporarily returned to the position when all the reels are stopped in the previous unit game. .. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the game is being played continuously from the previous unit game.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, an example in which the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) manages the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination in the “normal game state” (“initial state”, “normal state”, and “chance zone”) will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination may be managed by the main control circuit 41. In the modified example 4, an example thereof will be described.

When the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination is managed by the main control circuit 41, the mode lottery table shown in FIG. 69 and the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of the replay combination shown in FIG. 71 are stored in the main ROM 52 or the like, and the replay combination is continuously won. The replay counter that manages the number of winnings is stored in the main RAM 53. In addition, the process of managing the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination is performed in the winning search process.

Next, the winning search process in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. In this example as well, the winning search process is performed in S12 in the main flow shown in FIG. 84, as in the above embodiment.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the replay combination has won a prize (S511). In S511, when the main CPU 51 determines that the replay combination has not won a prize (when the determination in S511 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S520 in FIG. 123, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S511 that the replay combination has won a prize (when the determination in S511 is YES), the main CPU 51 changes the replay combination to "replay 0", "replay G3", or "replay G8". It is determined whether or not the replay combination is included (S512).

In S512, when the main CPU 51 determines that the replay combination is not the replay combination included in the "replay 0", "replay G3", or "replay G8" (when the determination in S512 is NO), the main CPU 51 is described in S519. Is processed. On the other hand, in S512, when the main CPU 51 determines that the replay combination is a replay combination included in "replay 0", "replay G3", or "replay G8" (when S512 is a YES determination), the main CPU 51 determines. It is determined whether or not the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT1 state, or the RT7 state (S513).

In S513, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT state is not the RT0 state, the RT1 state, or the RT7 state (when the determination in S513 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S519 described later. On the other hand, in S513, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT1 state, or the RT7 state (when the determination in S513 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the replay counter (S514). ..

After the processing of S514, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the replay counter is "2" or more (S515). In S515, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the replay counter is not "2" or more (when the determination in S515 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S519 described later.

On the other hand, in S515, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the replay counter is "2" or more (when the determination in S515 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the AT lottery table at the time of continuous winning of the replay and AT. A lottery is performed (S516). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the AT lottery has been won (S517).

In S517, when the main CPU 51 determines that the AT lottery has not been won (when the determination in S517 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S519 described later. On the other hand, in S517, when the main CPU 51 determines that the AT lottery has been won (when the determination in S517 is YES), the main CPU 51 updates the value of the reel effect counter to "1" (S518).

After the processing of S518, or when S512, S513, S515 or S517 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 51 makes an automatic medal insertion request (S519), and then performs the processing of S520 described later.

When the determination in S511 is NO, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the replay counter to "0" (S520).

After the processing of S519 or S520, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination related to "F_rip G9" (internal winning combination corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointer "30": see FIG. 23). Is determined (S521). In S521, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not the combination related to "F_lip G9" (when the determination in S521 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S525 described later.

On the other hand, in S521, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a combination related to "F_lip G9" (when the determination in S521 is YES), the main CPU 51 has an effective line of "clown matching" symbol combination. It is determined whether or not it is displayed above (S522). In S522, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is displayed on the effective line (when the determination in S522 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S525 described later.

On the other hand, in S522, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is not displayed on the effective line (the symbol combination of "clown alignment" is missed) (when the determination in S522 is NO), The main CPU 51 updates the missing flag to "1" (S523). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the reel effect counter to "1" (S524).

After the processing of S524, if S521 is a NO determination or S522 is a YES determination, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the "RT5 transition combination" has won a prize (S525). In S525, when the main CPU 51 determines that the "RT5 transition combination" has not won a prize (when the determination in S525 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 87). Move to S13.

On the other hand, in S525, when the main CPU 51 determines that the "RT5 transition combination" has won a prize (when the determination in S525 is YES), that is, the RT state shifts to the RT5 state and the "pseudo-bonus" game is started. If so, the main CPU 51 performs ART continuous lottery processing (S526). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs lottery using the ART continuation lottery table shown in FIG. 74, and acquires the value of the ART continuation occurrence flag / counter (any of "0" to "5").

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter with the value of the ART continuation generation flag / counter acquired in S526 (S527). Then, after the process of S527, the main CPU 51 ends the winning search process and shifts the process to S13 of the main flow (see FIG. 87).

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the number of ART additional games is set according to the value of the additional generation flag and type ("0" to "11") acquired when the additional number of ART games is confirmed during the "pseudo-bonus". Then, a processing example of determining the effect pattern type of the "additional effect" based on the set number of additional games has been described. That is, in the above embodiment, an example in which the number of additional games is determined at the time when the addition of the number of ART games is determined (when the value of the additional occurrence flag and type is determined) has been described. Not limited to.

For example, when the addition of the number of ART games is confirmed, the content of the reel production (each time the addition generation flag and the value of the type are updated) during the "addition effect" without determining the number of additional games ( The number of additional games may be sequentially added according to the content of the symbol display effect).

More specifically, in the "additional effect", the number of ART additional games set according to the effect pattern type of the reel effect currently being performed is determined before the current reel effect is performed. It may be added to the number of additional games. In this case, the total number of ART games to be finally added is determined before the "sorry effect" performed at the end of the "additional effect". In the fifth modification, an example thereof will be described.

FIG. 124 shows an example of the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table (additional game number determination means) used in the modification 5. The additional generation flag / type data subtraction value table used in this example defines the additional generation flag / type subtraction value and the number of additional games set according to the effect pattern type.

The outline of the operation of the "additional effect" in this example is as follows. In the "additional effect", first, a reel effect (first reel effect) corresponding to the effect pattern type determined based on the value (initial value) of the additional generation flag and type acquired by the additional lottery is performed. As a result, the subtraction value and the number of additional games corresponding to the content (effect pattern type) of the first reel effect are determined from the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table shown in FIG. 124. Next, the value of the additional generation flag and type is updated by subtracting the subtraction value of the additional generation flag and type determined in the first reel effect from the initial value of the additional generation flag and type.

Next, the effect pattern type is determined again by lottery based on the updated value of the additional generation flag and type. Next, a reel effect (second reel effect) corresponding to the value of the effect pattern type determined again is performed. As a result, the subtraction value and the number of additional games corresponding to the content (effect pattern type) of the second reel effect are determined from the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table shown in FIG. 124.

Next, the addition generation flag and type subtraction value determined in the second reel effect (effect pattern type) is subtracted from the value of the addition generation flag and type corresponding to the second reel effect, and the addition is generated again. Update the value of the flag and type. Further, at this time, the number of ART additional games determined in the second reel production is added to the number of ART additional games determined in the first reel production.

After that, the value of the additional generation flag / type is updated to "1", and the above-mentioned update processing and updating of the additional generation flag / type are performed until the reel effect ("sorry effect") of the effect pattern type "0" is performed. The reel effect processing based on the added addition generation flag and the value of the type, and the addition process of the number of additional games are repeated for each reel effect. Therefore, the number of ART games to be finally added is determined before the "sorry effect" performed at the end of the "additional effect".

Here, while explaining the operation example of the "addition effect" when the addition generation flag and type "3" is acquired by the addition lottery, the procedure of the addition processing of the number of addition games in this example will be described more concretely. To do.

First, when, for example, the effect pattern type "2" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the acquired additional generation flag and type "3", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After that, the design display effect (first reel effect) of "Top line red 7 alignment" is performed. In this case, as shown in the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table in FIG. 124, "1" is acquired as the subtraction value, and "50" is acquired as the number of addition games.

Next, the subtraction value "1" is subtracted from the initial value "3" of the addition generation flag and type, and the value of the addition generation flag and type is updated to "2".

Next, when, for example, the effect pattern type "3" is determined by the lottery process of the effect pattern type based on the updated additional generation flag and type "2", the reel action effect corresponding to the reel action pattern 2 is produced. After that, the design display effect (second reel effect) of "bottom line red 7 alignment" is performed. In this case, as shown in the addition generation flag and type data subtraction value table in FIG. 124, "1" is acquired as the subtraction value, and "40" is acquired as the number of addition games. Then, the number of additional games "40" acquired in the second reel production is added to the number of additional games "50" acquired in the first reel production, and the total number of additional games is "90".

Next, the subtraction value "1" is subtracted from the value "2" of the addition generation flag and type, and the value of the addition generation flag and type after the second update becomes "1".

Next, a reel effect (“sorry effect”) corresponding to the additional generation flag and type “1” after the second update is performed, and the additional effect is completed. Therefore, in such an operation example, the number of additional games of ART is finally "90".

As described above, also in the modified example 5, when the additional lottery is won during the ART, even if the symbols are not aligned at the start of the rotation of the reel, a predetermined symbol combination can be easily performed by the reel effect. Can be displayed on. Further, in the modification 5, the number of additional games is determined according to the number of reel effects in the "additional effect" and the effect pattern (display symbol and display line) of each reel effect, so that the content of the "additional effect" is included. On the other hand, it is possible to have expectations for the number of additional games.

[Other various modifications]
In the above embodiment, the reel effect is performed in a predetermined unit game in the "ART state"("pseudo bonus (RT5 state)" or "pseudo bonus relief state (RT6 state)"), and the reel effect is performed at the start of the game. Although the example in which the reel effect is performed during the acceleration processing period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect may be performed even in a gaming state other than the “ART state”.

For example, in the above embodiment, the period of acceleration processing such as the next unit game of the unit game in which the transition of the game state to the "ART state" is confirmed, or the next unit game of the unit game in which the addition of the number of ART games is confirmed. Although the example of performing the reel effect has been described in the above section, a predetermined reel effect may be performed in a unit game in which the transition of the game state to the “ART state” is confirmed or in a unit game in which the addition of the number of ART games is confirmed. Further, not only in the "ART state", but also in the "normal game state" and the "pseudo-bonus preparation state", the reel effect corresponding appropriately may be performed according to the functions provided in each game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the reel production other than the "additional production" ("clown missing production", "pseudo bonus winning pretending production" and "continuation confirmation production"), special symbol combinations ("red 7 matching", "red 7 matching", " Although an example of displaying "RB alignment" and "clown alignment") on the effective line (center line) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. In the reel effect other than the "additional effect", the special symbol combination may be displayed on a line other than the center line (for example, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, cross-down line, etc.).

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 41 ... Main control Circuit, 42 ... Sub control circuit, 51 ... Main CPU, 52 ... Main ROM, 53 ... Main RAM, 81 ... Sub CPU, 82 ... Sub ROM, 83 ... Sub RAM

Claims (2)

Multiple reels with multiple symbols arranged on each peripheral surface,
A symbol display area for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of each reel, and
By rotating each of the reels based on the satisfaction of a given start condition,
A symbol changing means for changing the symbol displayed in the symbol display area, and
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition,
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the reels and accepting the stop operation of the player, and
When the stop operation means is operated by the player, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, so that the reel is displayed in the symbol display area. Stop control means to stop the fluctuation of the existing symbol,
A notification means for notifying the player of stop operation information,
When a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the special combination can be notified by the notification means from the next game regardless of the stop display mode finally displayed in the symbol display area. Special state control means to control the state and
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a special effect in which the special stop display mode is displayed in the symbol display area is executed when the next game is started. A reel effect control means capable of controlling each of the reels is provided.
The special combination is configured so that the special stop display mode may or may not be finally displayed in the symbol display area according to the stop operation of the player.
The special effect can be executed when the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, and a stop display mode different from the special stop display mode is displayed in the symbol display area. And
The notifying means is a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of information on a stop operation even in a game in which the special effect is executed. The special effect is a game in which the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, and is not executed when the special stop display mode is displayed in the symbol display area, and the symbol display is performed. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein when a stop display mode different from the special stop display mode is displayed in the area, the game is executed in the first game in the special state .

Images